JP2018038577A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To make it easy for a shop assistant to check an initial operation of a movable member.SOLUTION: When a paper-rock-scissors presentation is performed, an accessory 200 is caused to be operated and a decorative display of displaying a flame image 310 and the like is performed. On the other hand, when the accessory 200 is caused to perform an initial operation during activation processing, the decorative display is not performed but characters such as "During setting change" is displayed. In an initial operation control, a first operation control is performed for causing the accessory 200 to return the original point and a second operation control is performed for checking the operation. In the first operation control, the accessory 200 is controlled to be operated at a speed equal to or less than the lowest speed in the second operation control.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

  As a gaming machine, a predetermined number of bets are set, and a slot machine in which a plurality of types of identification information are variably displayed based on a start operation, and a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is played by a launching device. And a pachinko gaming machine in which a plurality of types of identification information are variably displayed when a game medium is won in a starting area such as a prize opening provided in the gaming area.

  As such a gaming machine, there is one that includes a movable body and displays an effect image corresponding to the movable body when the movable body is operated (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-208308 A

  In order to confirm whether or not the movable body operates accurately, a store clerk or the like sometimes performs an initial operation of the movable body when the power is turned on. In this case, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, no consideration is given to the display of the effect image during the initialization operation. Therefore, the display of the effect image may make it difficult for the store clerk to confirm the initialization operation of the movable body.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily confirming the operation of the movable body.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment or the pachinko gaming machine P of a modified example),
The position of the origin (for example, the position (origin position) of the character accessory 200 shown in FIG. 4, the standby position hidden behind the character accessory 200, the position in the par state where the finger is opened, and the specific part of the rotating body 201 ′ are located. 56) and a position away from the origin position (for example, the position (drive position) of the character accessory 200 shown in FIG. 56, the advance position, the position of the goo and the choke state, and the specific part of the rotating body 201 ′. A movable body (for example, a character accessory 200, an arm member 300, a finger member 311 and a rotating body 201 ′) provided so as to be movable between the position and the position of the rotating body).
Driving means (for example, a first driving device 99a, a second driving device 99b, a third driving device 99c, and a fourth driving device 99d) for operating the movable body;
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body by the drive means (for example, the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 drives the first drive device 99a, the second drive device 99b, the third drive device 99c, and the fourth drive device 99d. Control part), and
Decoration display means (for example, the liquid crystal display 51) capable of displaying a decoration image corresponding to the movable body (for example, the flame image 310, the enemy character image 400, and the character image of “Janken” shown in FIG. 56B). The sub-control unit 91 displays the flame image 310 and the like),
With
The control means can perform first operation control (for example, non-detection operation control or detection operation control shown in FIG. 44) and normal operation of the movable body for positioning the movable body at the origin position. Initialization operation control including second operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for confirming this, and third operation control (for example, sub-control unit 91) for performing effects by the movable body, 3 control (actual operation control) can be performed, such as control to execute a Janken production (movable body production),
When the movable body moves to a position other than the origin position during execution of the third motion control (for example, when the in-game process of FIG. 46 is being executed by the sub-control unit 91), the decoration display means The decorative image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the flame image 310, the image of the enemy character 400, and the image of the character “Janken” are displayed during the production of the roar), and the initialization operation is performed. When the movable body is displaced to a position other than the origin position during the execution of the control (for example, when the startup process of FIG. 41 is performed by the sub-control unit 91), the decoration image is not displayed (for example, As shown in FIG. 57 (B), during the activation process, even when the character combination 200 is displaced to the driving position, the flame image 310, the enemy character image 400, and the KENKEN Not display any character in the image referred to. Further, in the activation process of FIG. 41, processing for displaying these images is not performed),
In the second operation control, the control unit controls the movable body to operate within a range of a first speed and a second speed higher than the first speed (for example, the sub-control unit 91 When the actual operation check operation control is executed, the movable accessory moves at a speed within the range of the minimum speed (low speed) as the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the minimum speed. Control to work.),
In the first operation control, control is performed so that the movable body operates at a speed equal to or lower than the first speed in the second operation control (for example, the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 performs the first operation control. When performing non-detection operation control or detection operation control, a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control as the second operation control (in this embodiment, the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control). Speed) to control the character object 200, the arm member 300, and the finger member 311 to move)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the decoration image is not displayed during the initialization operation, it is possible to easily check the operation of the movable body. In the first operation control, since the movable body operates at a speed that can be stopped at any timing, it can be safely positioned at the origin position.

The gaming machine of means 1 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first operation control, the control unit controls the movable body to always operate at a single speed (for example, the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 performs non-detection as the first operation control. When executing the operation control at the time of detection and the operation control at the time of detection, as shown in FIGS. ) The part that controls the movable accessory to operate at the minimum speed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the speed when the movable body is positioned at the origin position can be made constant, and damage to the movable body can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or means 1,
In the first operation control, the control unit controls the movable body to operate at the first speed in the second operation control (for example, the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 performs the first operation. When the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the control is executed, as shown in FIGS. 45B and 45C, as shown in FIGS. Part that controls things to work)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the period of the first operation control can be shortened by selecting the maximum speed at which the movable body can be safely operated without excessively reducing the speed while ensuring the safe operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1, means 1, and means 2,
Detection means capable of detecting that the movable body is located at the origin position (for example, a first origin detection sensor 105a, a second origin detection sensor 105b, and a third origin detection sensor 105c).
With
The control means includes
When the movable body is not detected by the detection means, non-detection operation control is performed as the first operation control. When the movable body is detected by the detection means, the first operation control is performed. Control operation at the time of detection is performed (for example, if the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 does not detect the origin detection sensor corresponding to the target movable body in step S104 in the accessory initialization process), the process proceeds to steps S105 to S114. When the origin detection sensor corresponding to the target movable body is in a detection state in step S104, the operation control operation at the time of detection in steps S120 to S128 is executed).
In the non-detection operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the speed at which the movable body is operated in the detection operation control (for example, the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 performs step S106). In the above, when the non-detection operation control as the first operation control is executed, the minimum control speed is set so that the movable accessory operates at the minimum speed in the detection operation control).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of a defect in the detection means by the first operation control.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 3,
The control means includes
If the movable body is not detected by the detection means when a specific abnormality has occurred, the movable body is controlled to perform an abnormal operation control as the first operation control (for example, a sub- When the sub CPU 91a of the control unit 91 is not in a detected state in all the origin detection sensors of the target feature in step S109 in the accessory initialization process due to a failure abnormality of any of the drive devices 99a, the operation error determination count is “ 3) to move the movable body that is not located at the origin position toward the origin position)
In the abnormal-time operation control, control is performed so that the movable body operates at a speed equal to or lower than the speed at which the movable body is operated in the detection-time operation control (for example, the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 in step S207 The part that sets the minimum control speed so that the movable accessory moves toward the home position at the minimum speed in the action control for actual operation confirmation)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the movable body can be safely operated even in the abnormal operation control.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 4,
The control means performs control so that the second operation control is not performed even when the movable body is detected by the detection means by the abnormal-time operation control (for example, the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 performs (If there is a return-to-origin error stored in step S201 in the object initialization process, the process proceeds to S220 and the actual operation check operation control is not performed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from stopping at a position other than the origin position during the second operation control due to an abnormality.

A gaming machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 5,
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, a character combination 200) and a second movable body (for example, a rotational body 201 ′ of the rotational combination 201),
The control means performs the first motion control and the second motion control for the first movable body, while only performing the second motion control without performing the first motion control for the second movable body. (For example, the character combination 200 is determined as the origin detection target movable body, and the actual motion confirmation motion control as the second motion control is performed together with the motion control during detection as the first motion control or the motion control during non-detection. However, with respect to the rotating body 201 ′ of the rotating accessory 201, since it is not determined as the origin detection target movable body in the slot machine, only the actual operation confirmation operation control is performed without performing the operation control at the time of detection or the operation control at the time of non-detection. Part to do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second operation control can be performed only for the necessary movable body, and the operation confirmation time by the second operation control can be shortened.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, 1 to 6,
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, a character accessory 200) and a second movable body (for example, the arm member 300 or the finger member 311),
In the first operation control of each of the first movable body and the second movable body, the control means controls the movable body to operate at the first speed in each of the second operation controls. (For example, when the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as the first operation control of the character accessory 200, the arm member 300, or the finger member 311, respectively. The part that controls the movable accessory to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for the actual operation confirmation)
The speed in the first motion control differs between the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, even if the same control speed is set in the first motion control corresponding to each movable accessory, (If there is a difference in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of the accessory, the actual operating speed of each movable accessory is not necessarily the same.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the period of the first operation can be shortened while ensuring the safe operation of each movable body at the operation speed according to each movable body.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 7,
The decoration display means can display predetermined information that is not displayed during the game during the initialization operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 57B, during the initial operation of the character accessory 200, If the setting has been changed, the message “Setting is being changed” is displayed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the initialization operation is being performed, and it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the predetermined information from being hindered by the decorative display.

The gaming machine of means 9 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 8,
When the movable body is operating at a position other than the origin position, one of a plurality of types of effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. It further includes an effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of effects including a small flame effect,
The decoration display means can display different decoration images according to the effects executed by the effect execution means (as shown in FIG. 56B), a large flame image is displayed in the large flame effect, and a small flame image is displayed. A small flame image is displayed in the flame production)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, different decoration images can be displayed according to the effects being executed by the effect executing means, so that the effect of effects in which the displacement of the movable body and the decoration images are linked can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 10 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 9,
The movable body can be operated in any one of a plurality of different modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 56C, the finger member 311 of the character accessory 200 is made of goo, choki, par) Can change to either),
The decoration display means can display a different decoration image corresponding to the mode after the movable body is operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, an effect image 320 corresponding to the shape of the finger member after the change is displayed. To do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to display a decoration image corresponding to the mode after the operation of the movable body, so that it is possible to improve the effect of rendering the movement of the movable body and the decoration image.

The gaming machine of means 11 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 10,
Corresponding to the operation of the movable body, a notification means (for example, sub-control unit 91) that notifies that a predetermined production condition has been achieved (for example, mission achievement notification executed in S96 of FIG. 46); ,
The notification is restricted when the movable body performs an operation different from the production operation (for example, even if the initial action of the character accessory 200 is executed in S52 of the activation process shown in FIG. 41) And a limiting means that is not executed).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent notification that a predetermined production condition has been achieved when the movable member is operated for a reason other than the production operation.

The gaming machine of means 12 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 11,
There are a plurality of timings at which the movable body performs a production action (for example, as shown in FIG. 48, the timing at which the character actor 200 operates is determined by the fact that the character achievement 200 is operated when the mission achievement condition of the mission M3 is satisfied. The character actor 200 moves when the actor action condition is satisfied, including the timing when the character accomplishment condition of the mission M5 is established, the timing when the character actor 200 moves when the mission achievement condition is established, or the condition established when the bonus is won. There is a timing to do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the interest can be improved and the opportunity to achieve the production conditions can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 13 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 11 or means 12,
A variable display unit that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified (for example, a sub-reel that is electronically displayed as described in [Mission Achievement Notification] of the modification),
After variably displaying the variable display unit, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit,
The notification means includes
When the variable display portion is variably displayed, the fact that the production condition has been achieved is displayed with priority over the variable display portion of the variable display portion (during the change of the sub reel, the mission is displayed on the front layer of the sub reel. Display achievement characters),
When the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, the display result is prioritized to indicate that the effect condition has been achieved (the display result is derived by stopping the sub reel). When completed, the mission achievement character is displayed in an area different from the area from which the display result is derived)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visual recognition of the derived display result can be prevented.

A gaming machine according to means 14 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 11 to means 13, wherein
When the displacement of the movable body is impossible, the effect condition is achieved (for example, when it is determined in S88 that the mission achievement condition for the accessory-related mission is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 46). If it is determined that the character combination 200 cannot be operated by the drive position sensor 106 even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the mission achievement notification is executed in S96. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is possible to eliminate the unreasonable reason that the production condition is not achieved due to the failure of the movable body due to a failure or the like, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

The gaming machine of means 15 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1, means 1 to means 14,
A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After variably displaying the variable display portion, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portion, and a winning can be generated according to the display result (for example, slot machine 1),
A notifying unit (for example, a payout amount display unit 12) for notifying information about a game;
Notification state control means (for example, main control unit 41, FIG. 54 (b)) for controlling the notification state of the notification unit;
Setting change control means (for example, main control unit 41) that controls the setting change state in which the degree of advantage can be changed by changing the setting value to any one of the setting values (for example, numerical values of 1 to 6). )
The notification state control means includes
As a result of the game, the notification state of the notification unit can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a state where the number of payouts is displayed on the payout number display unit 12),
At the time of powering on the gaming machine, the notification state of the notification unit is controlled to the notification state at the time of occurrence of power interruption (for example, the same display state as the display state of the payout amount display unit 12 at the time of power interruption)
After the setting change state ends, the notification state of the notification unit is controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a state where “0” is displayed on the payout number display unit 12),
When the notification state of the notification unit is controlled to the specific state (for example, a state in which the number of payouts is displayed on the payout number display unit 12), the notification unit notifies the user when a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 30 seconds have passed). The state is controlled to the predetermined state (for example, a state in which “0” is displayed on the payout number display unit 12) (for example, FIGS. 54B and 54E).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by controlling the notification state of the notification unit to a predetermined state when a predetermined time elapses in the specific state, preparation can be prevented while reducing the work burden on the store clerk.

The gaming machine of means 16 of the present invention is a gaming machine of means 15,
The notification unit notifies information related to game value (for example, information related to the number of medals paid out).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a countermeasure against preparation for a notification unit that allows a player to easily execute preparation.

The gaming machine of means 17 of the present invention is a gaming machine of means 15 or means 16,
When the notification state control unit controls the notification state of the notification unit to the specific state (for example, a state in which the number of payouts is displayed on the payout number display unit 12) when the power is turned on, the predetermined time elapses (for example, 30 seconds), the notification state of the notification unit is controlled to the predetermined state (for example, a state where “0” is displayed on the payout number display unit 12).
According to this feature, even if the notification unit is not in a predetermined state when the power is turned on, the notification state of the notification unit can be controlled to a predetermined state by elapse of a predetermined time. The notification state of the notification unit can be controlled to a predetermined state by the power-on operation when the store is opened.

The gaming machine of means 18 of the present invention is a gaming machine of means 15 to means 17,
When the predetermined time elapses without starting a new game after the previous game ends, a customer waiting state is entered (for example, a demonstration effect is executed when 30 seconds elapse from the previous game end). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the timer that controls the notification state of the notification unit to a predetermined state and the timer that controls to the customer waiting state can be shared.

The gaming machine of means 19 of the present invention is a gaming machine of means 15 to means 18,
A power saving mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced by the elapse of the predetermined time without starting a new game after the end of the previous game (for example, the power saving mode is entered after 30 seconds from the end of the previous game). ).
According to this feature, the timer that controls the notification state of the notification unit to a predetermined state and the timer that switches to the power saving mode can be shared.

The gaming machine of means 20 of the present invention is a gaming machine of means 15 to means 19,
A plurality of the variable display units, a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results of the plurality of variable display units,
A pre-determining means (for example, an internal lottery process) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L to 8R) operated by the player for deriving the display result;
Derivation control means (for example, reel rotation processing) for performing control for deriving a display result in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means and the operation of the derivation operation means;
Of the combinations of the display results of the plurality of variable display units, a prize indicating whether or not a winning has occurred based on a combination of identification information on a predetermined line (for example, a winning line LN) straddling the plurality of variable display units. A winning determination means for determining (for example, a winning determination process);
Suggestion means (for example, processing for suggesting cherry lip winning by the sub-control unit 91) indicating that the determination result of the prior determination means is a predetermined result (for example, strong cherry lip winning) that allows the occurrence of a predetermined winning. When,
Further comprising
The derivation control means includes
When the determination result of the prior determination means is the predetermined result (for example, strong cherry lip winning) and the derivation operation means is operated in a specific procedure (for example, the stop switch is operated at the timing when the target is successfully pressed) A display result in which the identification information on the predetermined line becomes the specific identification information as the display result of the specific variable display section (for example, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C) of the plurality of variable display sections. (For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), cherry symbols are aligned on the winning line LN),
When the determination result of the pre-decision means is the predetermined result (for example, strong cherry lip winning) and the derivation operation means is operated in a procedure different from the specific procedure (for example, stop at the timing when the target fails) When the switch is operated), a display result in which the identification information on the predetermined line is different from the specific identification information as the display result of the specific variable display section (for example, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C). (For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (f), the replay symbols are aligned on the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN), while the predetermined variable display portion (for example, different from the specific variable display portion) , Right reel) as a display result, a display result in which the identification information on the predetermined line becomes the specific identification information is derived (for example, as shown in FIG. Cherry symbols are led out to the right reel 2R on emissions LN)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even when the derivation operation means is operated in a procedure different from the specific procedure, a display result in which the identification information on the predetermined line becomes the specific identification information as the display result of the predetermined variable display unit is derived. Therefore, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the identification information displayed on the predetermined line.
Note that when the derivation operation means is operated at a specific timing, or when the derivation operation means is operated so as to stop the fluctuation display in a specific order, the fluctuation display is performed in a specific order. The operation may be stopped and may be a predetermined specific operation such as when the operation is operated at a specific timing.

The gaming machine of means 21 of the present invention is the gaming machine of claim 1, means 1 to means 20,
A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
After variably displaying the variable display portion, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portion, and a winning can be generated according to the display result (for example, slot machine 1),
Game control means for controlling the game (for example, main control unit 41),
Production control means (for example, sub-control unit 91) that produces effects based on control information (for example, commands) transmitted from the game control means;
Derivation operation means (for example, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
A notification means (for example, the game auxiliary display 12) capable of performing notification;
With
The game control means includes
Derivation operation enabling means for activating an operation (for example, a stop operation) of the derivation operation means when an activation condition is satisfied after the variable display of the variable display section is started;
A notification control unit capable of performing control (navigation notification) to notify operation mode information (navigation number) that can identify the operation mode of the derivation operation unit by the notification unit;
The derivation operation enabling means is re-enabled after the power supply is resumed when the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped after the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means is validated. Do not validate the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means until the condition is satisfied,
The notification control means stops power supply in a state where the operation of the derivation operation means is validated and a control (navigation notification) for notifying operation mode information (navigation number) by the notification means. Then, when power supply is resumed, control (navigation notification) is performed so that the notification means notifies the operation mode information (navigation number) at an earlier timing than the operation of the derivation operation means is validated. Restart (see, for example, FIG. 33)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the power supply is stopped in a state where the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled, when the power supply is resumed, the period until the validation condition is established again after the power supply is resumed Since the operation of the derivation operation means is not validated in, it is possible to prevent the display result from being derived in a situation where it is unknown whether the rotation is normal after the power supply is resumed.
In addition, when the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped in the state where the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled and the control means is informing the operation mode information by the notification means, the derivation is performed. Since the control for notifying the operation mode information by the notification unit is resumed at a timing earlier than the operation of the operation unit being validated, the operation mode information is erroneously notified without the player knowing that the operation mode information has been notified. It is possible to prevent the derivation operation means from being operated in an operation mode other than the operation mode identified by.
The operation mode of the derivation operation unit in the means 1 is an operation mode operated at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode operated in any one of a plurality of operation orders, An operation mode or the like by a combination is applicable. An activation condition for enabling the operation of the derivation operation means after the variable display of the variable display section is started; and an activation condition for enabling the operation of the derivation operation means after the restart of power supply. , May be under the same conditions or different conditions.

The gaming machine of the means 22 of the present invention is a gaming machine of the means 21,
The notification control means uses the notification means (for example, the game auxiliary display 12) to control the operation mode information at a timing earlier than the time when the operation (for example, the stop operation) of the derivation operation means is validated after the game is started. Control (for example, navigation notification) for notifying (navigation number) is started.
According to this feature, after the game is started, control for informing the operation mode information by the notification unit is started at a timing earlier than the operation of the derivation operation unit is validated, so that the player notifies the operation mode information. It is possible to prevent the derivation operation means from being operated in an operation mode other than the operation mode identified by the operation mode information without knowing that it has been performed.

The gaming machine of means 23 of the present invention is a gaming machine of means 21 or means 22,
The derivation operation enabling means does not validate the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means when a fluctuation abnormality (reel rotation abnormality) is detected after the operation of the derivation operation means is validated,
The notification control means is configured so that the notification means (game auxiliary indicator 12) operates the operation mode information (navigation number) even when a fluctuation abnormality (reel rotation abnormality) is detected after the operation of the derivation operation means is validated. ) Is continuously controlled (navigation notification).
According to this feature, after the operation of the derivation operation unit is validated, the control of informing the operation mode information by the notification unit is continued while the operation of the derivation operation unit is not validated when a fluctuation abnormality is detected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the derivation operation means in an operation mode other than the operation mode identified by the operation mode information without knowing that the operation mode information has been notified.

The gaming machine of means 24 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 21 to means 23,
The game control means (main control unit 41) can transmit control information (push order command) that can specify operation mode information (navigation number) to the effect control means (sub control unit 91),
The effect control means (sub-control unit 91) is a notification effect (navigation) that can identify an operation mode identified by operation mode information based on control information (push order command) that can specify operation mode information (navigation number). It is characterized by the fact that it can be performed).
According to this feature, it is possible to notify the operation mode identified by the operation mode information by the effect control device controlled by the effect control means, and it is possible to enhance the effect when the operation mode information is notified.

The gaming machine of means 25 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 24,
The game control means (main control unit 41) is in a state in which the operation of the derivation operation means is validated, and the notification means (game auxiliary indicator 12) notifies the operation mode information (navigation number) ( When the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped in a state where the navigation notification is being performed, the operation mode information (navigation number) is obtained at an earlier timing than the operation of the derivation operation means is validated. Identifiable control information (push order command) is transmitted to the effect control means (sub control unit 91).
According to this feature, the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped in a state where the operation of the derivation operation means is validated and in a state where the notification means is informing the operation mode information. Sometimes, the control information capable of specifying the operation mode information is transmitted to the effect control means at an earlier timing than the operation of the derivation operation means is validated, so that when the power supply is resumed, It is possible to start a notification effect before the operation is activated, and the player is in an operation mode other than the operation mode that is erroneously identified by the operation mode information without knowing that the operation mode information has been notified. It is possible to prevent the derivation operation means from being operated.

The gaming machine of means 26 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 21 to means 25,
The variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) has a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) that are driven by changing the excitation state. The displayed reels (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) are moved and displayed in a variable manner.
The game control means includes excitation state control means (main control unit 41) that performs control to change the excitation state according to a control pattern (excitation pattern),
The excitation state control means supplies power in a state in which control is performed to change the excitation state according to a predetermined control pattern (starting pattern, constant speed pattern as an excitation pattern) for moving the reel among control patterns (excitation patterns). When power supply is resumed after stopping, control to change the excitation state from the first excitation state in the start control pattern (starting pattern) that starts moving the reel in the control pattern (excitation pattern) is started. It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped in a state where the excitation state is changed according to the predetermined control pattern for moving the reel In addition, instead of starting the control to change the excitation state from the continuation of the excitation state when the power supply in the predetermined control pattern is stopped, the excitation is started from the first excitation state in the start control pattern in which the movement of the reel is started. Since the control for changing the state is started, the movement of the reel can be smoothly started even after the power supply is resumed.
The predetermined control pattern for moving the reel may include a start time control pattern for starting the movement of the reel.
Further, the start-time control pattern may be a control pattern for starting the movement of the reel toward the reel variation mode in the predetermined control pattern, or in a variation mode different from the reel variation mode in the predetermined control pattern. It may be a control pattern for starting the movement of the reel.

The gaming machine of means 27 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any of means 21 to means 26,
The variable display unit has reels (reels 2L, 2C) on which a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) driven by changing the excitation state are arranged. 2R), the display is variably displayed by moving,
The game control means includes
When normal rotation is not detected when the validation condition is satisfied (stop operation acceptance is validated) (steps after the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position is detected without detecting the reel reference position) Rotation abnormality determination means (main control unit 41) for determining rotation abnormality (reel rotation abnormality) when the number exceeds a predetermined number of steps;
Restart control means (main control unit 41) for performing restart control to change the excitation state with a pattern (starting pattern) at the start of rotation of the reel when it is determined that the rotation is abnormal;
When the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped after the activation condition is satisfied (the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled), the excitation state is changed from the state when the power supply is stopped. Resumption means (main control unit 41) for resuming control to be changed,
The restart control means performs the restart control even when it is determined that the rotation abnormality (reel rotation abnormality) after the control for changing the excitation state by the restart means is resumed.
The derivation operation validation means includes
When it is determined that there is a rotation abnormality (reel rotation abnormality) in a state where the operation of the deriving operation means is enabled (a state where reception of the stop operation is enabled), restart from when it is determined that the rotation is abnormal Do not validate the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means in the period until the validation condition (constant speed rotation and detection of the reel reference position) is satisfied after the control is performed,
When the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped after the power supply is stopped in a state where the operation of the deriving operation means is enabled (a state where reception of the stop operation is enabled), from the time when the power supply is restarted. After the normal rotation is detected (reel reference position detection) or the rotation abnormality (reel rotation abnormality) is determined and restart control is performed, the enabling condition (constant speed rotation and reel reference position detection) is It is characterized in that the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means is not validated during the period until it is established.
According to this feature, when the rotation of the reel is started and the operation of the derivation operation unit is validated and it is determined that the rotation is abnormal, the restart control is performed to change the excitation state with the pattern at the start of the rotation of the reel. Therefore, every time it is determined that the rotation is abnormal, the progress of the game is not disabled, so that the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, since the operation of the derivation operation means is not validated during the period from when the rotation abnormality is determined until the validation condition is satisfied after the restart control is performed, the display result is derived in a situation where the rotation is not normal. Can be prevented.
In addition, when the power supply is resumed after the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled and then the power supply is resumed, the control for changing the excitation state from the state when the power supply is stopped is resumed. After that, when normal rotation is detected, the operation of the derivation operation means can be validated from that time, so that even if a momentary power failure occurs, the game is immediately started if normal rotation is maintained. Can be advanced.
In addition, when power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped with the operation of the derivation operation means enabled, there is not enough torque to rotate the reel and it is determined that the rotation is abnormal. Since the restart control is performed and the progress of the game is not disabled, the game can be smoothly advanced. In such a case, the operation of the derivation operation means is validated during a period from when the power supply is resumed until the validation condition is satisfied after the rotation abnormality is determined and the restart control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result from being derived in a situation where it is unknown whether the rotation is normal after the power supply is resumed.

The gaming machine of means 28 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 21 to means 27,
The game control means (main control unit 41)
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining a display result allowed to be derived before the display result is derived;
Advantageous operation mode advantageous for the player (pause advantageous for the player) when the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) becomes the notification target result (notification target role) to be notified (navigation notification) Notification state control means for controlling to a notification state in which (in order) is notified (a state in which navigation notification is executed);
Specific control information for transmitting specific control information (first internal winning command, second internal winning command) related to the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) to the effect control means (sub control unit 91) Transmission means (internal winning command setting process),
Regardless of whether or not the specific control information transmission means is controlled to the notification state (state where navigation notification is executed), the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is the notification target result (notification target role). ), The specific control information (second internal winning command) that cannot specify the advantageous operation mode (stop order advantageous for the player) can be specified to the effect control means. It is characterized by being transmitted to.
According to this feature, the game control means side has an advantageous operation in the configuration including the game control means and the effect control means, wherein the information related to the determination result of the prior determination means is specified from the specific control information transmitted from the game control means In addition to controlling to the notification state in which the mode is notified, the game control means, when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the notification target result, regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the notification state, Since the specific control information that can specify that it has become, but cannot specify the advantageous operation mode is transmitted to the effect control means, it is possible to pre- Since the advantageous operation mode according to the determination result of the determination unit is not specified, the process related to the transmission of the specific control information can be simplified and fraud is made on the production control unit side. It can be prevented also advantageous operation mode in a state that is not controlled in the broadcast status from being broadcast.

The gaming machine of means 29 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any of means 21 to means 28,
The game control means includes
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining a display result allowed to be derived before the display result is derived;
Numerical value setting means for setting different numerical values (winning numbers) for each determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery),
Predetermined control means for performing predetermined control (internal winning flag setting, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc.) according to the numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means;
Advantageous operation mode advantageous for the player (pause advantageous for the player) when the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) becomes the notification target result (notification target role) to be notified (navigation notification) Notification state control means for controlling to a notification state in which (in order) is notified (a state in which navigation notification is executed);
Specific control information transmitting means for transmitting specific control information (first internal winning command, second internal winning command) related to the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) to the effect control means,
As a numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means when a notification target result (notification target role) is reached, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned,
The specific control information transmitting means notifies when the numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means is within a predetermined numerical range in a state other than at least a notification state (a state in which navigation notification is executed). Specific control information (second internal winning command) that cannot specify the advantageous operation mode (stop order advantageous to the player) but can specify that the target result (notification target role) has been obtained is the effect control means (sub-control unit) 91).
According to this feature, the game control means side has an advantageous operation in the configuration including the game control means and the effect control means, wherein the information related to the determination result of the prior determination means is specified from the specific control information transmitted from the game control means In addition to controlling to the notification state in which the mode is notified, the game control means can specify that the notification target result is obtained when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes the notification target result at least in a state other than the notification state. However, since the specific control information that cannot identify the advantageous operation mode is transmitted to the effect control means, the determination result from the specific control information is changed to the determination result of the prior determination means regardless of whether or not the game control means controls the notification state. Therefore, the advantageous operation mode is notified without being controlled to the notification state even if the production control means side is cheated. That put away can be prevented. Further, as a numerical value set by the numerical value setting means when the notification target result is obtained, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the game control means determines whether or not the notification target result. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the numerical value used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target result, it is possible to simplify the processing when transmitting the specific control information.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a figure which shows the whole structure of a game system. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a portable terminal. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a management server. It is a front view of the slot machine of the embodiment to which the present invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of bonus, the design combination of a bonus, and the technical matter relevant to a bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of re-game player, the symbol combination of a re-game player, and a re-game player. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of re-game player, the symbol combination of a re-game player, and a re-game player. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of output, the design combination of an output, and the technical matter relevant to an output. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the response | compatibility procedure of a push order. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning number and transmission number of the special role in the 1st internal winning command which a main control part transmits. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning number and transmission number of the general combination and re-game combination in the 2nd internal winning command which a main control part transmits. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the control content of the internal winning command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the navigation number in the pushing order command which a main control part transmits. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the control content of the pushing order command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the control content of the winning determination command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the satisfaction timing of stop operation validation conditions in a reel rotation process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the satisfaction timing of stop operation validation conditions in a reel rotation process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the establishment timing of the reel rotation error in a reel rotation process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the satisfaction timing of stop operation validation conditions in the reel rotation process after a power failure return. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a game auxiliary | assistant display. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting | reporting aspect by navigation alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the modifications 1 and 2 of the alerting | reporting aspect by navigation alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting | reporting aspect by error alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of the game auxiliary | assistant display device in a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of the game auxiliary | assistant display before and behind a power failure. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the selection situation of the excitation pattern of a reel motor in control of a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of the game auxiliary | assistant display at the time of error generation. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control about the control regarding switching of the display mode of a game auxiliary | assistant display. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control about the modification of the control regarding switching of the display mode of a game auxiliary | assistant display. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining signals input and output between the slot machine and the test apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating a game history database. It is a figure for demonstrating the flowchart of a starting process (main). It is a figure for demonstrating the flowchart of a starting process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory initialization process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and real operation confirmation operation control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of operation speed of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and real operation confirmation operation control. It is a figure for demonstrating the flowchart of a process (sub) in a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for production determination. It is a figure for demonstrating a mission database. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of a re-game player winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of a re-game player winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of a small combination winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of a re-game player winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of a small combination winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting | reporting aspect of various alerting | reporting parts. It is a figure for demonstrating the display pattern of the payout number display part. It is a figure for demonstrating Janken production. It is a figure for demonstrating the difference in the process during a turning effect execution and a starting process execution. It is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine P of a modified example.

[First Embodiment]
[Game system]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of a gaming system 1001 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming system 1001 includes a slot machine 1 and a management server 1200. The slot machine 1 is installed in a game hall (hall), and the management server 1200 is connected to the Internet network 900. The management server 1200 is held by the manufacturer of the slot machine 1 (provider of the slot machine 1). Data exchange between the slot machine 1 and the management server 1200 is performed via a portable terminal 1100 having a two-dimensional code reading function and a connection function to the Internet network 900. 2 and 3 are block diagrams showing the configuration of the portable terminal 1100 and the configuration of the management server 1200 according to the present embodiment, respectively.

[Configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 4 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing 1a. A liquid crystal display 51 is provided at the upper center of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a display area, and a predetermined effect can be executed in the display area. Further, the slot machine 1 has a transmissive region 51 b that can be transmissive corresponding to the see-through window 3. The player can visually recognize the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel) that are juxtaposed inside the housing 1a through the see-through window 3 (transmission region 51b). . FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of each reel. On the reels 2L to 2R, a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified are arranged in a predetermined order. The number of reels is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more. Moreover, although the variable display part has shown the example comprised by the physical reel, you may be comprised by image display apparatuses, such as a liquid crystal display.

  Further, the slot machine 1 includes two combinations of a character combination 200 and a rotation combination 201 on both sides of the liquid crystal display 51. The character accessory 200 can be displaced (moved) between an initial position (origin position or standby position) and a driving position (effect position). As shown in FIG. 4, the initial position is a position that does not overlap the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as shown in FIG. 56, the drive position is a position where a part of the character combination 200 overlaps the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The character combination 200 of this embodiment has a girl motif. The rotating character 201 is a circular character, and the character object 200 is displaced to the driving position by the rotation of the rotating body 201 ′ rotatably supported on the rotation shaft at the center, so that the character This is an accessory for informing (or suggesting) to the player that an effect using the accessory 200 is executed. Therefore, the rotating combination 201 operates when the character combination 200 is displaced to the driving position.

  The sub-control unit 91 can control the first driving device 99a to displace (move) the character accessory 200 between the initial position and the driving position, and control the fourth driving device 99d. Thus, the rotating accessory 201 can be rotated. The first drive device 99a and the fourth drive device 99d include, for example, a stepping motor. In FIG. 4, only the character combination 200 and the rotation combination 201 are shown, and the description of the first drive unit 99a and the fourth drive unit 99d is omitted, but the first drive unit 99a and the fourth drive unit are omitted. The device 99d is provided in the character combination 200 and the rotation combination 201.

  As described above, the character accessory 200 is a movable body that itself moves. However, the character accessory 200 has an origin position (standby position) hidden behind the character accessory 200 as described later. An arm member 300 that is a movable body that is provided so as to be able to move back and forth in the advance position where the player is visibly exposed to the player, and that can swing vertically in the advance position, and the arm member 300 And a finger member 311 which is a movable body that can operate in any of the modes of goo, choki, and par (see FIG. 56). That is, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of movable bodies including the character combination 200, the arm member 300, the finger member 311, and the rotation combination 201 as the movable bodies.

  In addition, the character accessory 200 moves the arm member 300 forward and backward, and moves the second driving device 99b for swinging the arm member 300 and the finger member 311 to any one of goo, choki, and par. A third driving device 99c is mounted. In the present embodiment, as described above, the first driving device 99a for displacing (moving) the character accessory 200 to the driving position (effect position) is also mounted on the character accessory 200. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first driving device 99a may be provided in the vicinity of the initial position of the character accessory 200 on the front door 1b without being mounted on the character accessory 200.

  The second drive device 99b and the third drive device 99c may be configured by any one or more of a stepping motor, a solenoid, a spring member, and the like.

  The sub-control unit 91 also includes a first origin detection sensor 105a provided in the vicinity of the initial position of the front door 1b and a character accessory in order to detect that the character accessory 200 is located at the origin position. Since the driving position sensor 106 provided in the vicinity of the driving position of the front door 1b is connected to detect that the 200 is positioned at the driving position, the first origin detection sensor 105a and the driving position sensor 106 Based on this detection signal, it can be determined whether or not the character accessory 200 is located at the origin position or the driving position. Further, the character accessory 200 is in a state where the second origin detection sensor 105b for detecting that the arm member 300 is located at the origin position and all the fingers whose finger members 311 are located at the origin position are opened. A third origin detection sensor 105c for detecting the position at the corresponding position is also mounted. Each of these origin detection sensors may be a photo sensor, for example, and may be composed of a plurality of sensors for the purpose of improving detection accuracy as well as a single sensor.

  Thus, the character combination 200, the arm member 300, and the finger member 311 are all movable bodies that require detection of the origin position by the sensor, and are set as the origin detection target combination. On the other hand, since the rotating combination 201 is merely a rotating component, no sensor for detecting the origin position is provided as shown in FIG. Absent.

  At the lower right of the liquid crystal display 51, a medal insertion portion 4 into which medals can be inserted is provided, and at the lower part of the front door 1b, a medal payout opening 9 through which medals are paid out and speakers 53, 54 are provided.

  Further, as an example of the operation means, the front door 1b is provided with a prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state within the credit range stored as the gaming value (the number of medals) owned by the player. A MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting, a settlement switch 10 that is operated when the credit and the set number of bets are settled and returned, a start switch 7 that is operated when starting the game, and reels 2L to 2R Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when each of the rotations is stopped, an effect switch 56 for use in effects, and the like are provided.

  The front door 1b is provided with a game display unit 13 for notifying information related to a game as an example of a notification unit. The game display unit 13 includes a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, and a game auxiliary display 12 that displays a payout number of medals and an error code in the event of an error (hereinafter referred to as a payout number display). 1BETLED 14, 2BETLED15, 3BETLED16 for informing the set number of bets, the insertion request LED 17 for informing that a medal can be inserted, and the start switch 7 can be operated to start the game. It is in a wait state after waiting for the start of the start of the LED 2 and the start switch 7 (notifying the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R since a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game). LED 19 during the wait to notify the replay after replay winning Replay During LED20 indicating that a being arm is provided.

  When playing a game in the slot machine 1, first, a predetermined number of bets (for example, 3) are set by inserting medals into the medal insertion unit 4 or operating the MAXBET switch 6. As a result, the winning line LN becomes valid, the operation to the start switch 7 becomes valid, and the game can be started. If medals are inserted with the bet number set, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line for determining whether a combination of symbols displayed on the see-through windows 3 of the reels 2L to 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, an example in which only one winning line LN is provided will be described. However, a plurality of winning lines may be provided. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is formed so as to rise from the lower left to the upper right. In addition, invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are provided to make it easy to recognize that the combination of symbols constituting the winning line is aligned with the winning line LN. The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not lines for which a winning determination is made, but when a combination of specific winning symbols is arranged on the winning line LN, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, bell- (Bell-Bell) makes it easy to recognize that a combination of symbols constituting a specific prize is arranged on the winning line LN.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L to 2R are rotated to display the symbols variably, and when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. The three symbols are derived and displayed as display results on the upper, middle, and lower stages of the fluoroscopic window 3. The symbols that can be selected and displayed (display results) are those that are displayed on the winning line LN when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and four frames ahead from there. It is a symbol for a total of 5 frames. When a predetermined number of bets (for example, 3) are set, each winning line is activated and the game can be started. When a combination of winning symbols stops on the winning line LN and a winning occurs, a predetermined number of medals are given to the player according to the winning and the credit is added or the credit reaches the upper limit (50). In this case, medals are paid out from the medal payout exit 9.

  As for the symbol arrangement of each reel in FIG. 5, the cherry symbols are always arranged within 5 frames in the right reel 2R. In addition, the watermelon symbols are always arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C. In each reel, the range that can be pulled in within a predetermined time is within 5 frames, so it is always possible to derive a cherry symbol on the right reel 2R when winning a cherry lip winning, which will be described later, and always when winning a watermelon It is possible to derive a watermelon symbol on the middle reel 2C.

  FIG. 6 is a view showing the internal structure of the slot machine 1. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a functional configuration example of the slot machine 1. In the example of FIG. 7, a game control board 40 that controls the progress of the game and outputs various commands according to the progress of the game, an effect control board 90 that controls a predetermined effect according to the command, and a drive power supply for the electrical components A power supply board 101 for generating a signal and an external output board 1000 for outputting a signal according to the progress of the game to the outside are provided.

  The game control board 40 advances the game based on detection signals from switches such as various operation means and detection means (illustrated on the left side of the game control board 40 in FIG. 7), and notifies means (game control in FIG. 7). Display devices such as the example on the left side of the substrate 40 are driven and controlled. Further, the game control board 40 drives and controls the reel motors 32L to 32R based on signals from the reel sensors 33L to 33R.

  A circuit configuration (illustrated in the game control board 40 in FIG. 7) such as the main control unit 41 is mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 performs processing related to the progress of the game, and directly or indirectly controls the configuration mounted on or connected to the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 is a one-chip microcomputer and includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an I / O port, and the like.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to an effect switch 56 and drives and controls an effect device such as the liquid crystal display 51 (illustrated on the left side of the effect control board 90 in FIG. 7). The effect control board 90 is mounted with a circuit configuration such as the sub-control unit 91 (illustrated in the effect control board 90 of FIG. 7). The sub-control unit 91 receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40, performs a process of performing an effect, and directly or indirectly controls a configuration mounted on or connected to the effect control board 90. The sub-control unit 91 is a one-chip microcomputer and includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an I / O port, and the like. The circuit configuration of the sub-control unit 91 includes, for example, a clock device 97 (hereinafter also referred to as RTC) for measuring at least one of date and time. The sub-control unit 91 can execute effect control according to, for example, at least one of the date and time counted by the RTC 97, a detection signal from the effect switch 56, and the like. A hopper motor 34b, various operation means and detection means (illustrated on the right side of the power supply board 101 in FIG. 7) and the like are connected to the power supply board 101.

  8 to 12 are diagrams for explaining various winning combinations. In addition, in the remarks column in FIG. 11 and the like, index symbols and the like corresponding to other ways of calling the winning combination are shown. The index symbol refers to a symbol that can be aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 and a symbol that may be aligned when a combination of symbols that generate a prize stops on the winning line LN. For example, the index symbol of bell 1, bell 2, and AT1 to AT32 is “bell”, and the indicator symbol of watermelon is “watermelon”. In the present embodiment, a notification effect (hereinafter also referred to as a winning suggestion effect) for notifying a corresponding index symbol when winning a lottery target to be described later is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram for describing the type of the outcome, the symbol combination of the outcome, and the technical matters related to the outcome. The outcome of FIG. 13 is when winning one of 9 bell left 1-8, 9 bells 1-8, 9 bell right 1-8, which will be described later, and winning 9 This is a specific result that is derived only when the winning combination that is won is missed without operating in accordance with the procedure corresponding to the type of the bell. For such a specific outcome, no medal is paid out.

  In addition, for the watermelon among the winning combinations, the symbol “bell” is the same as the indicator symbol of the right-down bell, the middle bell, and the upper bell, although it is not a symbol that can be aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. It is determined as a special winning design. The specific winning symbol is a symbol corresponding to the right reel 2R in the combination of winning symbols of the right-down watermelon, and can be stopped on the winning line LN when winning / winning the right-down watermelon. When the watermelon is won, an effect using the index symbol and an effect using the specific winning symbol can be executed. In the notice effect, a character image of a symbol corresponding to the index symbol and the specific winning symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41. The slot machine 1 in the present embodiment has a plurality of types of gaming states including RT0 to RT4 in which replay is won with a predetermined winning probability, and bonuses that are improved compared to when the winning probability of a small role is in RT0 to RT4. Among them, the game state is controlled to one of the corresponding game states from when the start condition is satisfied until the end condition is satisfied (see the winning combination or the outcome shown along the arrow in FIG. 14). Specifically, normal (most of games) is controlled by RT1. Then, when winning the preparation lip (Lip 4) in RT1, the process shifts to RT2, where the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than RT1. Furthermore, when the winning lip (Lip 5) is won in RT2, the process shifts to RT3 having a higher probability of winning the re-gamer than RT2. Further, in RT2, when a fall lip (Lip 2, Lip 3) wins or a bell spills (right spill, middle spill, left spill), the process proceeds to RT1. In addition, when the lip 1 wins in RT2, the control to the RT2 is maintained. Also, at RT3, when a falling lip (Lip 2, Lip 3) wins or bell spills (right spill, middle spill, left spill), the process proceeds to RT1. RT2 and RT3 are gaming states that have a higher probability of winning a re-gamer than RT1 and are advantageous to the player.

  When one of BB1 to BB5 is won, RT4 is controlled. The winning flag that is set when any one of BB1 to BB5 is won is carried over until winning of the winning BB occurs. Also, RT4 is controlled continuously from BB winning to BB winning. When a BB winning occurs during RT4, the bonus is controlled, and the bonus is ended by paying out more than the number of medals described with reference to FIG. The types of replays to be randomly selected are determined for each RT type (see FIG. 15). During the bonus, regardless of the operation timing and operation procedure, a bell winning can be generated with a very high probability, and the number of medals can be increased efficiently. For this reason, the bonus is an advantageous state for the player.

  FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are diagrams showing combinations of lottery object combinations that are read out as lottery object combinations (hereinafter, the winning lottery object combination is also referred to as a winning combination) for each gaming state. The lottery target column indicates the name, the winning combination column indicates the combination of winning combinations included in the lottery target, and the game status column indicates the lottery for each RT type with a circle. It indicates that the target combination is a lottery target. For example, the reach eye lip shown in FIG. 15 is a lottery target in any state of RT0 to RT3, but is not drawn in RT4. Also, in RT4, replays other than off, pass through, middle tier lip, strong cherry lip, and weak cherry lip are set not to win. Instead, the winning probabilities of the middle cherry lip, strong cherry lip, and weak cherry lip are set higher in the RT4 state than in other RT states.

  Below, the combination with which the corresponding procedure (push order) is associated is referred to as “push order”. Further, the bell associated with the push order is referred to as “push order bell”, and the replay associated with the push order is referred to as “push order lip”. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the pushing order bells are 9 bell left 1 to left 8, 9 bell 1 to middle 8, 9 bell right 1 to right 8. As shown in FIG. 15, the push order lips are the preparation lips 1 to 6, the maintenance lips 1 to 3, and the rush lips 1 to 6. In the following, “9 bells left 1 to 8 left” are collectively referred to as “9 bells left”, “1 9 out of 9 bells” are collectively referred to as “9 bells in middle”, “9 "Bell right 1 to right 8" are collectively referred to as "9 bell right".

  FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the handling procedure. For example, the corresponding procedure (the pressing order associated with each other) on the left of the 9th bell is the first left stop. Therefore, for example, when 9 left bells are won, reel control is performed to win the bell 1 when the first stop is left, and pull-in is possible when an operation other than the first left stop is performed. In such a case, the reel control is performed so that the other combination (any one of AT1, AT12, AT23, and AT30) is won, and when the pull-in is impossible, the left-handed result is derived.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 16, in a gaming state other than RT4, a bonus may be won simultaneously with other winning combinations. For example, for BB1, only BB1 wins alone, BB1 and reach lip, BB1 and middle cherry lip, BB1 and strong cherry lip, BB1 and weak cherry lip, BB1 and chance 1, BB1 and chance 2, and There are cases where a combination of BB1 and watermelon is won. In addition, in the bonus, for example, a common bell is set as a lottery target and it is determined that a winning combination is made with a very high probability. The common bell is a role that can generate a prize regardless of the operation timing. For this reason, during the bonus, regardless of the operation timing and operation procedure, the common bell winning can be generated with a very high probability, and the number of medals can be increased efficiently. For this reason, the bonus is an advantageous state for the player.

  In addition, the ratio of the winning combination that is won at the same time as the bonus is as follows: reach> middle cherry lip> strong cherry lip> weak cherry lip> watermelon> chance 1> chance 2. The percentage of winning the bonus alone is set lower than the percentage of winning simultaneously. Therefore, the player can have an expectation for the bonus winning when a notification effect described later, which is suggested to be won by some lottery target role, is executed.

  In addition, for the lottery target roles shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the number of determination values related to the winning probability of winning the lottery target role in the internal lottery is determined. For example, for the common bell, in any state of RT0 to RT4, for example, “360” is determined as the number of determination values, and is won by 360/65536. Among the lottery target roles, the number of determination values of each lottery target role corresponding to a bonus or a small role is determined so that the winning probability is the same regardless of the RT. On the other hand, among the lottery target roles, the number of determination values of each lottery target role corresponding to the re-playing role is determined so that the winning probability differs depending on the type of RT.

  Here, in the narrow sense, “game” in the slot machine 1 refers to a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L to 2R are stopped. Since the number is set, the medals are paid out and the game state is shifted after the reels 2L to 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense.

[Game processing]
The main control unit 41 performs a game control process to control one game. In the game control process, first, a BET process for setting a bet amount and performing a credit settlement / a bet settlement is performed.

  When the start switch 7 is operated after setting the betting amount, a random number value is extracted from a predetermined random number circuit, and it is determined (internal lottery) whether or not a winning is allowed based on the extracted random number value. The internal lottery process (see FIG. 15, FIG. 16, etc.) is performed. The random number circuit updates a numerical value within a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 65535) according to a predetermined update rule. The main control unit 41 extracts a numerical value updated by the random number circuit when the start switch 7 is operated as a random value. When a lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, a winning combination winning flag included in the lottery target combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM. For example, when winning BB1, a BB1 winning flag is set, and when winning a watermelon, a watermelon winning flag is set. The winning flags of BB1 to BB5 are carried over until the winning BB is won, while the winning flags corresponding to winning combinations other than BB1 to BB5 are determined when the winning game ends regardless of whether or not a winning has occurred. Will be erased.

  When the internal lottery process ends, a reel rotation process is performed. In the reel rotation process, after a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of reel rotation in the previous game, after the reels 2L to 2R start to rotate, the stop switches 8L to 8R are activated. And the rotation of the reel is stopped according to the stop operation. In the reel rotation process, when a predetermined freeze condition is satisfied, a freeze effect is executed that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period (delays the activation of the stop operation of each of the stop switches 8L to 8R). After executing the freeze effect processing for performing, the stop switches 8L to 8R may be validated to shift to the normal game.

  When the reels 2L to 2R are stopped and the reel rotation process is completed, a winning determination process (see FIGS. 9 to 12 and the like) is performed for determining whether or not a winning has occurred based on the symbol combination on the winning line. . Further, the state shown in FIG. 14 is controlled according to the symbol combination on the winning line.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the occurrence of a prize, various processes not related to the prize (for example, the process related to the bonus end control by counting the number of medals paid out in the bonus, and the winning without carryover) Flags (deletion of a winning combination such as a small combination / re-playing combination) are performed). Further, when it is determined that any one of BB1 to BB5 has been won, the winning flag of the winning BB is deleted. In the game end process, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game (see FIG. 14 and the like) is executed. Thereby, the game control process for one game is completed, and the game control process for the next one game is started.

[About processing related to AT]
The main control unit 41 can be controlled to AT (assist time) in addition to advantageous states such as bonuses and RT2 and RT3. The main control unit 41 executes an AT lottery to determine whether or not to control by the AT. Further, the main control unit 41 can specify the corresponding procedure (push order) for stopping the symbol combination advantageous to the player on the winning line LN when the AT is determined to be controlled by the AT lottery. A process for executing a navigating effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs navigation notification using the game auxiliary display 12 (see FIG. 29), and the sub-control unit 91 displays a corresponding procedure on the liquid crystal display 51 to produce a navigation effect. Perform (not shown).

  During the non-AT, the main control unit 41 performs a specific AT lottery target role (in this embodiment, middle stage cherry lip, strong cherry lip, weak cherry lip, watermelon, BB1 to BB5, shown in FIGS. 15 and 16). When a common bell is won, an AT lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to control the AT. In addition, when the specific lottery winning combination is won during AT, an AT addition lottery is executed. The AT lottery process may be executed after the internal lottery is performed in the internal lottery process, for example, as long as it is executed at a predetermined timing in the progress of one game.

  In the AT lottery process, it is determined whether to control to AT, and when it is determined to control to AT, the number of AT games is determined from a plurality of types of games (50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300). . The number of AT games is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41. Further, the main control unit 41 draws the timing for starting the AT. The main control unit 41 determines, for example, by random number lottery that an AT will be started after 0 to 32 games have elapsed since the AT winning game.

  The reliability that is determined to be controlled by the AT in the AT lottery and the expected value of the number of AT games determined when controlled by the AT (the average number of games to be acquired), which is the advantage for the player, is a specific lottery target It is determined so as to differ depending on the type of the combination. For example, the AT lottery is performed in the order of the middle cherry lip, the strong cherry lip, the weak cherry lip, the watermelon, and the common bell, and the common bell is lowest. In addition, the reliability determined to be controlled by AT in the AT lottery and the expected value of the number of AT games determined when controlled by AT are the same when the same specific lottery target is won When the specific lottery target is not simultaneously won with BB1 to BB5 (for example, when winning strong cherry lip), for example, when winning with BB1 to BB5 (for example, when winning BB1 + strong cherry lip) An AT lottery will be held so that is higher.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect for notifying the corresponding indicator symbol when any of the lottery winning combinations is won and when any winning combination is won. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, the index symbols of the lower right bell, the middle bell, and the upper bell are bells. In addition, the watermelon is not a uniform symbol and a symbol that may be aligned on the invalid line LM4, but the same “bell” as the bell indicator symbol is defined as the specific winning symbol. The specific winning symbol is a symbol corresponding to the right reel 2R among combinations of winning symbols of the lower right watermelon included in the watermelon, and is a symbol that can be stopped on the winning line LN when winning the lower right watermelon. . When the watermelon is won, an effect using the index symbol and an effect using the specific winning symbol can be executed. In the notice effect, a character image of a symbol corresponding to the index symbol and the specific winning symbol is displayed. In addition, when the cherry lip is won, a notice effect indicating that the cherry is won is executed. For example, when winning a cherry lip (when winning a strong cherry lip, weak cherry lip, or middle cherry lip), a character image corresponding to a cherry symbol is displayed.

  When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 performs navigation notification by winning the push order, and also performs the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command to the sub control unit 91. By transmitting the winning command and the pressing order command, the navigation control by the sub-control unit 91 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute navigation notification and execute a navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in a normal state that is not set to AT.

[Internal winning command setting process]
Next, the control content of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of lottery subject, and a lottery subject that may be carried over, that is, a special role winning number table in which a winning number for each type of special role is set, A lottery target that is not carried over, that is, a general winning number table in which a winning number for each type of general winning is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the special role winning number table, when no special role is won, that is, the winning winning number is “0”, and the winning numbers of BB1 to BB are “1” to “5”. "Is assigned. Further, as shown in FIG. 19, in the general combination winning number table, “0” is selected as the winning number of the re-playing combination when no general combination is selected, that is, in the case of a loss. “30” to “60” are assigned as winning numbers for small roles. As described above, in the special combination winning number table and the general combination winning number table, the lottery subject for internal lottery and the winning number are set correspondingly.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes an internal lottery process when a start operation is performed, and when any of the special combination and the general combination is won in the internal lottery The winning number corresponding to the lottery subject for which the winning is determined is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and if no winning combination is won, the winning number corresponding to the loss is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number indicating the winning of the general role is cleared at the end of one game, while the winning number indicating the winning of the special role is maintained until the winning special role is won, and the selected special role is won by winning Cleared.

  After setting the winning number, the main control unit 41 executes an internal winning command setting process, and based on the internal winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command The command is set in the command queue, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the timer interruption process (main) thereafter.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, in the internal winning command setting process, first, the winning number of the special role set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is acquired (Sf1), and the acquired winning number is displayed. The transmission winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf2), and the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. The command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of 2 bytes, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command content). When storing the first internal winning command in the command queue, 41 stores MODE indicating that the first internal winning command is in the first byte, and winning for sending the special role in the second byte EXT. Stores the number.

  In the step of Sf3, after storing the first internal winning command, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is acquired (Sf4), and the acquired winning number is less than 2. It is determined whether there is (Sf5), less than 17 (Sf6), less than 31 (Sf7), and less than 58 (Sf8). It is determined which of a plurality of predetermined ranges the number is in a predetermined range.

  If it is determined in step Sf5 that the winning number is less than 2, that is, if the winning number is 0 or 1, the acquired winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf12). If it is determined in step Sf5 that the winning number is not less than 2 and it is determined in step Sf6 that it is less than 17, that is, if the winning number is one of 2 to 16, the winning number for transmission is used. 2 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf11). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 17 in the step of Sf6 and is determined to be less than 31 in the step of Sf7, that is, when the winning number is any of 17 to 30, the winning number is The winning number for transmission is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf12). If it is determined in step Sf7 that the winning number is not less than 31 and it is determined in step Sf8 that it is less than 58, that is, if the winning number is any of 31 to 57, the winning number for transmission is used. 31 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). If it is determined in step Sf8 that the winning number is not less than 58, that is, if the winning number is 58 to 60, the winning number is set as a transmission winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf12). .

  Then, after the transmission winning number for the general role is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the steps Sf9, Sf11, and Sf12, the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number (Sf10). ). When storing the second internal winning command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating that it is the second internal winning command in the first byte, and plays a general role in the second byte of EXT. Stores the winning number for transmission. After the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue in step Sf10, the internal winning command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

  As described above, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the special role set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set as the winning number for transmission, and the first including the winning number for transmission is included. Set the internal winning command in the command queue.

  In the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 17 to 25, 30, 58 to 60). , Corresponding to a role different from both the push order bell and push order lip), the winning number is set as a sending winning number, and the second internal winning command including the sending winning number is set as a command Set to queue. Thus, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the first predetermined range is set in the internal winning, the internal lottery is performed based on the transmitting winning number included in the command. The winning number by can be specified.

  On the other hand, when the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 16, corresponding to the pressing order lip), one winning number (2) included in the second predetermined range is set as the winning number for transmission. Then, the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the second predetermined range is set in the internal winning, the winning is based on the winning number for transmission included in the command. While the number is in a second predetermined range, it cannot be specified, while the winning number can be specified in the second predetermined range.

  Further, when the winning number is within the third predetermined range (31 to 57, corresponding to the push order bell), one winning number (31) included in the third predetermined range is set as the winning number for transmission. Then, the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the third predetermined range is set in the internal winning, the winning is based on the winning number for transmission included in the command. While it is impossible to specify which number is in the third predetermined range, it is possible to specify that the winning number is in the third predetermined range.

  The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command set in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment are then executed by the timer interrupt process (main), so that the sub-control unit 91 Are sequentially transmitted.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to transmit a command composed of 2 bytes to the sub-control unit 91, but the form of the command shown in the present embodiment is an example, and other data A form may be used. In this embodiment, the command is composed of a 2-byte signal, but these commands may be composed of a 1-byte signal or a 3-byte or more signal.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to transmit a first internal winning command and a second internal winning command composed of 2 bytes to the sub-control unit 91. Although the configuration includes a winning number for transmission in the byte, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. For example, the first internal winning command, the second internal winning command, etc. Each winning command is composed of a 3-byte signal, and the configuration in which the winning number for sending a special role or the winning number for sending a general role is included in the third byte, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. It may be configured by one signal composed of 3 bytes, and a transmission number for special role transmission may be included in the second byte, and a transmission number for general role transmission may be included in the third byte.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning numbers of the special roles corresponding to the types of special roles (BB1 to 5) and the losing in the special role winning number table are separately assigned and assigned to the winning numbers of the special roles and the general roles. The general control winning number is set in the general winning number table, and the winning number of the general winning is set according to the type and deviation of the general winning. The main control unit 41 determines the winning number of the special winning and the general according to the result of the internal lottery. The winning number of the winning combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, but the winning number is assigned without being divided into the special winning role and the general winning role, for example, “BB1”, “small role”, “BB1 + winning simultaneously. A configuration may be adopted in which a winning number is assigned to each “small role” as one lottery target role. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets one winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery, so that the special combination and the small combination are selected based only on the one winning number. It is possible to perform predetermined control (setting of internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc.).

  Next, the control content of the push order command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19, 21, and 22. In this embodiment, a navigation number (0 to 9) that can identify the stop order of reels by navigation notification and a navigation number (10 to 14) that can identify a predetermined symbol suggested by navigation notification are assigned in advance, and lottery Among the target combinations, a push number combination is assigned a navigation number in advance for each type, and a navigation number table in which a navigation number for each type of lottery target combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  In the example of FIG. 21, for example, 0 is associated as the navigation number with respect to the standard push order (in this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop). Further, 1 is associated as the navigation number for the middle left and right (see also the navigation numbers in FIGS. 18 and 19). In the present embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is stopped first is applied as the standard push order specified by the navigation number 0. However, the standard push order is disadvantageously advantageous for the player. Other stop orders may be used as long as the standard push order does not occur.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 wins the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the start operation is performed and when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. A push order command setting process for setting a push order command corresponding to the number in the command queue is executed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, in the push order command setting process, first, the winning numbers of the special combination and the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process are acquired (Sg1), and then the RAM 41c. Referring to a predetermined flag indicating whether or not navigation notification is set in the predetermined area, a state in which navigation notification is performed (when navigation notification is performed during AT or non-AT, will be described later) It is determined whether or not the special role navigation notification condition is established until the special role is won (Sg2). If it is determined in step Sg2 that the navigation notification is not performed, whether or not the winning combination to be stopped on the winning line LN is confirmed based on the stop status of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the result of the internal lottery. Is determined (Sg5), and if the winning combination is not confirmed in the winning line LN, the standard navigation number (0 in this embodiment) is set as a transmission navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sg6).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the navigation notification is in the state at step Sg2, or when it is determined at step Sg5 that the winning combination to be stopped on the winning line LN is determined, it is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Referring to the navigation number table (see FIGS. 18 and 19), the navigation number corresponding to the winning number of the special combination and general combination acquired in step Sg1 is set as a transmission navigation number in a predetermined area of RAM 41c.

  At this time, if it is specified that the push order lip is won based on the internal winning number, an advantageous replay that promotes the RT state according to the type of the winning combination (Lip 4, Lip shown in FIG. 14). 5. A navigation number indicating the stop order in which the combination of Lip 1) that maintains RT2 is stopped on the winning line LN is set as a transmission navigation number. Further, when it is specified that the push order bell is won based on the internal winning number, the stop order in which the combination of bell 1 or bell 2 is stopped on the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. Is set as the transmission navigation number.

  Also, one of the special roles (BB1 to BB5) is won based on the internal winning number, and the navigation conditions for the special role navigation notification (in this embodiment, after winning the special role, a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) have passed)), and if it is specified that none of the small roles have been won (out of the game), it will depend on the type of the special role that has been won. A navigation number (10-14) that suggests a symbol constituting the special combination is set as a transmission navigation number.

  After the transmission navigation number is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Sg3 or Sg6, the push order command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission navigation number (Sg4). When storing the push order command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating the push order command in the first byte, and stores the transmission navigation number in EXT of the second byte. After the push order command is stored in the command queue in step Sg4, the push order command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

  As described above, when the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process, which is advantageous for the player when the navigation notification is being executed. If a command for pressing the order that can specify the stop order is set in the command queue and the navigation notification is not being executed, it is impossible to specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player, and this is a standard that is disadvantageous and advantageous for the player. A command for specifying the order of pressing is set in the command queue.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs a push order command setting process every time a stop operation is performed, so that even when the navigation notification is not being executed, the main control unit 41 stops at the winning line LN. Is determined, a push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is set in the command queue.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs the push order command setting process, for example, in a state where the gaming state is RT1 and no navigation notification is performed, (Left / Right / Right) is the winning case, and when any reel 2L, 2C, 2R is not stopped, the advantageous replay can be stopped, but it is not determined which combination will be stopped. The navigation number (“0”) is set as the transmission navigation number, and a push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Further, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, the advantageous replay can still be stopped, and it has not been determined which combination will stop, so the standard navigation number (“0”) is used as the transmission navigation number. A press order command including is set. When the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, only the advantageous replay can be stopped by the subsequent stop of the right reel 2R, and the combination to stop is determined. Therefore, even when navigation notification is not performed, a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player (stop order in which an advantageous replay is awarded) is set as the transmission navigation number. When a reel other than the left reel 2L is stopped in the first stop, after the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, and when a reel other than the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, the subsequent stop Regardless of the order, replays other than advantageous replays can be stopped, and since the winning combination is fixed, the navigation number that can specify the order of stop advantageous for the player even in a state where navigation notification is not performed Is set as the transmission navigation number.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 does not control the AT, and when the pushing order is won, the timing for determining the stop order that is advantageous to the player is determined for the player. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify an advantageous stop order is set and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The timing at which an advantageous stop order is determined is the timing at which the first stop operation is performed in the three-choice role (push order bell, maintenance lip, and rush-in lip), and in the six-choice role (preparation lip), This is the timing when the first stop operation is performed and it is determined that the winning combination advantageous to the player is not stopped, or the second stop operation is performed.

  In addition, in the game after the special role is elected and the predetermined navigation notification implementation conditions are satisfied with the special role winning being carried over, the internal lottery result is not a win for any small role. In this case, a push order command including a navigation number ("10" to "14") that suggests a symbol that constitutes one winning special role is set.

  The push order commands set in the push order command setting process of the present embodiment are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing a timer interrupt process (main) thereafter.

  When the sub control unit 91 specifies that the navigation notification is being performed on the main control unit 41 side based on the push order command, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command described above. In addition, a navigation effect is performed. When the sub-control unit 91 performs the navigation effect, the winning of the pressing order is specified based on the second internal winning command, and the navigation number is other than “0” based on the pressing order command. That is, when it is specified that the pressing order advantageous to the player is other than the standard pressing order, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a stop order image indicating the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the pressing order command. To display. In the navigation effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image that suggests a role that may be won based on the second internal winning command. At this time, for example, when the push order bell is won as the push order, the “bell” image is displayed to indicate the possibility of the push order winning, and the push order replay is won. If there is, the type of push order lip that may be won is specified based on the game state on the main control unit 41 side specified based on the game state command or the like, and is included in the specified push order lip It is possible to suggest the possibility of winning a winning combination that is advantageous to the player by performing an effect corresponding to the winning combination (for example, Lip 1 in the maintenance lip).

  Further, as an effect corresponding to the combination included in the push order lip in the navigation effect, for example, even when the push order lip is won in the internal lottery, in the internal winning command setting process on the main control unit 41 side, the second internal “2” indicating any winning in the push order lip is uniformly set as the winning number for sending the winning command, but the sub-control unit 91 selects the winning for sending based on the second internal winning command. By specifying that the number is “2” and that the gaming state is RT1 based on the gaming state command or the like, it is determined that the pushing order lip is won, and based on the pushing order command Together with an image indicating the stop order corresponding to the navigation number specified in this way, and an image suggesting the possibility of winning an advantageous replay by an operation according to the stopping order (in this embodiment, an advantageous replay By displaying an image) indicating the combination of symbols constituting, so that it is possible to perform an effect in accordance with an advantageous role for the player of the winning combination included in the press order descriptor.

  In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the special role has been won based on the first internal winning command as an effect suggesting that the special role has been won in the navigation effect, When a predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) satisfying the conditions for performing the navigation notification are established, a confirmation notification for notifying that the special role has been won in the internal lottery (special role for the liquid crystal display 51) Display a message and an image indicating that has been won. Then, after performing the definite notification, that is, after the condition for executing the special role navigation notification is established, the navigation number specified based on the push order command indicates a predetermined symbol of the special role In addition, by performing a stop operation at a timing at which a predetermined symbol can be stopped on the winning line LN according to the navigation number, a special role winning promotion effect (for example, specified based on the navigation number) that promotes the winning of the special role is performed. Display on the liquid crystal display 51 for displaying an image of a predetermined pattern. In this way, the sub-control unit 91 performs a predetermined number of games after the special combination is won based on the first internal winning command, and the main control unit 41 side establishes the conditions for performing the special role navigation notification. The main control unit 41 includes a navigation number that suggests a symbol that allows the special combination to be awarded after the condition for performing the navigation notification of the special combination is established. By transmitting the push order command, the special control winning promotion effect based on the navigation number can be performed by the sub-control unit 91 after the confirmation notification is performed.

  Next, the control contents of the winning determination command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of winning combination shown in FIGS. 8 to 11 (not shown), and a winning number in which a winning number is set for each type of winning combination. A table is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  Whether the main control unit 41 receives a winning according to the combination of symbols stopped on each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped after the start operation is performed. A winning determination process is performed to determine whether or not. In the winning determination process, for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination on the winning line LN is stopped, and the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped. If it is determined, the winning number table is referred to, and the winning number corresponding to the combination of symbols constituting the stopped winning combination is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, while the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination is set. Is determined not to stop, “0” indicating a loss is set as a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the winning determination process is terminated.

  Then, after executing the winning determination process, the main control unit 41 executes a winning determination command setting process for setting a winning determination command capable of specifying the winning number in the command queue.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the winning determination command setting process, a winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired based on the winning determination result in the winning determination process (Sh1), and the winning determination command is acquired based on the winning number. Is stored in the command queue (Sh2), and the winning determination command setting process is terminated. When storing the winning determination command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating the winning determination command in the first byte, and stores the winning number in EXT of the second byte.

  The winning determination command set in the winning determination command setting process is then sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interruption process (main).

  As described above, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes a winning determination command setting process to set a winning determination command including a winning number, A winning determination command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  In the winning determination command setting process of the present embodiment, a winning determination command including the winning number set in the RAM 41c in the winning determination process as it is is set in the command queue, so that a special command that can specify the winning number is used. The processing load can be reduced without performing the conversion process.

  In the present embodiment, since a winning number is assigned for each type of winning combination and stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the winning determination command including the winning number is based on the winning number. Thus, it is possible to specify a combination of symbols stopped on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and execute an effect.

  A conventional slot machine has a configuration including a game control unit that controls a game and an effect control unit that controls an effect, and the game control unit displays an internal lottery result when a predetermined push order is won. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not to control to the AT in which the navigation notification for notifying the operation procedure of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is executed. Regardless of whether or not the AT is controlled by the AT, the internal winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit, and the effect control unit specifies the internal lottery result based on the internal winning command and controls the game. In the case where the AT is controlled by the AT, a navigation effect is provided in which an operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified based on the specified internal lottery result.

  In such a configuration, the effect control unit can identify an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player based on the internal winning command regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. In this way, although the game control unit has not decided to control the AT, an operation procedure advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is identified from the internal winning command, and the operation procedure is There is a possibility of being notified by the production control unit.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment uses the first internal winning command and the general combination that can specify the winning situation of the special role as the internal lottery result as the internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A second internal winning command that can identify the winning status is set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, it is controlled by the AT. Regardless of whether or not the internal lottery result is a push order, it can be specified that the push order has been won, but in general it is not possible to specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player. Since the second internal winning command relating to the combination is set, the second internal winning command can respond to the internal lottery result regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. A common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether or not the AT is controlled without specifying an advantageous stop order for the player who has received the second internal winning command. The processing can be simplified, and it is possible to prevent the navigation stop from informing the stop order advantageous to the player in a state where the control is not controlled by the AT even if the sub-control unit 91 is cheated.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to notify the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, which is advantageous for the player, by navigation notification according to the pressing order won by the internal winning. The control unit 41 provides an operation mode operated at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode operated in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and an operation mode based on a combination thereof by navigation notification. Even in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 specifies that the push order is won regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Although the second internal winning command is set on the sub-control unit 91 side by setting the second internal winning command so that an operation mode advantageous to the player cannot be specified. Advantageous operation mode is not be identified for the player in accordance with the internal lottery result from de.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as the push order for executing the navigation notification. The main control unit 41 performs the internal lottery result in the internal winning command setting process. Is set to the second internal winning command so that it can be specified whether the push order is a push order replay or a push order bell. Therefore, when the internal lottery result becomes a push order, the sub control unit 91 can specify whether the push order is a push order replay or a push order bell. It is also possible to produce different effects depending on the type of order.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the AT, and in the state where the navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes a push order, the stop order advantageous for the player is specified. A push order command setting process for setting a push order command that can be performed is executed and the set push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the player on the side of the sub-control unit 91 in the state where the navigation notification is executed is performed. It is possible to perform a navigation effect that informs of an advantageous stop order.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as the push order for executing the navigation notification. The main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification in the push order command setting process. In the state where the internal lottery result becomes the push order replay and when the push order bell is reached, that is, in the state where the navigation notification is executed, the push order winning in the internal lottery is different type However, when the stop order advantageous for the player is common, the push order command including the common navigation number that can specify the stop order advantageous for the player is set, so the types of push order commands can be reduced. it can.

  In the push order command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment specifies a stop order that is advantageous to the player when the internal lottery result becomes a push order in a state where navigation notification is executed. While the push order command including the navigation number that can be set is set, the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified when the internal lottery result becomes the push order in a state other than the state where the navigation notification is executed. Since the push order command including the navigation number that can specify the standard push order (first left stop) is set, the internal lottery result became the push order regardless of whether or not the navigation notification is being executed. Sometimes, a process for setting a push order command including a navigation number can be shared.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R step by step every time the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and is advantageous for the player. The order is determined before the operation of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, that is, the third stop operation is completed. When the 3 choice push order bell is won, the first stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the advantageous lip is awarded. When the 6 choice push order lip is won, the second stop operation is performed. Thus, it is determined whether or not an advantageous replay can be won. In the push order command setting process, the main control unit 41 determines a stop order advantageous to the player when the internal lottery result becomes a push forward in a state other than the state where the navigation notification is executed, that is, After the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player according to the internal winning result is set and transmitted, so that the sub-control Stopping advantageous for the player on the sub-control unit 91 side when the internal lottery result becomes a push forward while preventing the stopping order advantageous for the player from being specified even if fraud is applied to the part 91 It is possible to produce effects according to whether or not the operations are performed in order.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the push order command setting process when the push order is won in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed. Is set, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous for the player is set, and the push order command is sent to the sub-control unit 91. However, a command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player after the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed and the stop combination is determined is different from the push order command. It may be a command, for example, by sending another command including the winning number of the push order winning in the internal lottery, which is advantageous for the player based on the type of push order winning It stopping order may be configured to allow specific, separately may be configured to provide a command containing identifiable navigation ID favorable stop order for the player. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 executes the push order command setting process only when the internal lottery is performed, and then, when the winning combination to be stopped is determined, the stop order advantageous to the player. By setting the process to set a command that can identify the command, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to execute a push order command setting process when an internal lottery is performed and when a stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is performed, After the winning combination to be stopped is determined, every time the pressing order command setting process is performed, a pressing order command capable of specifying a stopping order advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The push order command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player after the winning combination is determined may be transmitted at least once when the winning combination is determined. The configuration may be such that the push order command setting process is not executed after sending a push order command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the user. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a load related to transmission of a push order command by the main control unit 41.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs the push order command setting process when an internal lottery is performed and a stop operation is performed on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R in a state in which the navigation notification is performed. However, in a state where navigation notification is performed, the push order command setting process may be executed only when an internal lottery is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a load related to transmission of a push order command by the main control unit 41 in a state where navigation notification is performed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs an internal lottery when a start operation is performed, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result in the RAM 41c according to the internal lottery result, and sets the winning number set. The internal winning flag is set, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc. are performed, and the winning status of the special role is determined as an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A first internal winning command that can be specified and a second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of the general role are set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. As a result, the winning number when the push order is won as the internal winning result is assigned a consecutive number consisting of a predetermined numerical range. In the command setting process, when the winning number set in the RAM 41c is in the predetermined numerical range in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed under the control of the AT, Since the second internal winning command which can be specified but cannot specify the stop order advantageous for the player is set and the set second internal winning command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the main control unit 41 side Regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT, since the stop order advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is not specified from the second internal winning command, an improper is made on the sub-control unit 91 side. However, it is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous to the player from being notified by the navigation effect in a state that is not controlled by the AT.

  In addition, as a winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes a push order, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 determines that the internal lottery result is a push order. Whether or not the winning number used in performing the predetermined control is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the pressing order, so the second internal winning command is transmitted. Can be simplified.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as the push order for executing the navigation notification, and the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay. Since the consecutive number in the second predetermined range is assigned and the consecutive number in the third predetermined range is assigned as the winning number when the internal lottery result becomes the push order bell, the main control unit 41 When the internal lottery result becomes a push order, depending on whether the winning number is the second predetermined range or the third predetermined range, whether the internal lottery result is a push order replay, Since it is possible to determine whether or not the push order bell, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the second internal winning command in the internal winning command setting process.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can be controlled to a plurality of RT states, and in each gaming state, the type of push order replay as a push order determined in the internal lottery is different (this book) In the embodiment, for example, in RT1, a preparation lip is a lottery target, while a maintenance lip and a rushing lip are not lottery targets, and in RT2, a maintenance lip and a rushing lip are lottery targets. The winning number when the internal lottery result becomes the push order replay at RT1 and the winning number when the internal lottery result becomes the push order replay at RT2 are both 2 is assigned to a predetermined range (2 to 16), so in the internal winning command setting process, the internal lottery result is displayed in the push order replay in both RT1 and RT2. For determining whether it common processing to determine.

  In addition, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment responds to the internal lottery result when the internal lottery result is a role other than the pushing order in a state where it is not controlled by the AT. When the second internal winning command including the winning number is set and the internal lottery result is the push order replay which is the push order, one winning number included in the second predetermined range (2 to 16) In the embodiment, when 2 is included and the internal lottery result is the push order bell that is the push order, one winning number included in the third predetermined range (31 to 57) (31 in the present embodiment) By setting the second internal winning command including, even if the internal lottery result is a push-forwarding role or a role other than the push-forwarding role or in a state that is not controlled by the AT, the internal lottery Vs results Since the second internal winning command including the winning number to be transmitted is transmitted, the process of creating and transmitting the second internal winning command can be made common regardless of whether the internal lottery result is a push forward. it can.

  In the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the pushing order is given when the internal lottery result becomes the pushing order regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. Although it is possible to specify that it has been won, it is configured to set the second internal winning command related to the general role so that it is not possible to specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player, but when it is not controlled by the AT When the internal lottery result becomes a push order, the fact that the push order is won can be specified, but the second internal win related to the general role so that the stop order advantageous for the player cannot be specified While the command is set and the state is controlled by the AT, when the internal lottery result becomes the push order, the win number corresponding to the type of the push order that has been won is set. System A when in the state where it is being is, it may be elected the second capable of specifying the type of pressing order role internal winning command configured to be transmitted to the sub-controller 91. In such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, it is possible to specify the stop order advantageous for the player according to the type of the push order combination from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. The control unit 91 can notify the stop order advantageous for the player by the navigation effect. Further, in such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the winning number of the lottery subject in the internal lottery can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. For example, when the maintenance lip 1 is won, an effect suggesting the possibility that the replay 1 included in the maintenance lip 1 wins can be performed.

  Further, in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be configured not to execute the push order command setting process and transmit the push order command, and is controlled by the AT by adopting such a configuration. In the state, from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the type of the push order combination can be specified, and the stop order that is advantageous to the player on the sub-control unit 91 side. While being able to notify by a navigation effect, the load concerning transmission of the push order command by the main control part 41 can be reduced.

  The winning number for the push order replay and the winning number for the push order bell need only be set to a continuous numerical range, and the second predetermined range in which the winning number for the push order replay is set and the push order. A configuration in which the third predetermined range in which the winning number of the bell is set may be continued. Even in such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is a push order and whether or not the winning number used when performing the predetermined control is the push order. Since the determination can be made based on whether or not the value is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the process, the process for transmitting the second internal winning command can be simplified.

  Further, in this embodiment, 1 to 60 are assigned as the winning numbers for the general roles, and the winning numbers for the push order replay that is the push order are successively set in the first second predetermined range, The winning number of the push order bell that is the push order in the predetermined range of 3 is continuously set, and the win number of the non-push order is distributed in the numerical range around the second predetermined range and the third predetermined range. However, the winning number of all the non-pressing orders may be set continuously in the fourth predetermined range. By adopting such a configuration, whether or not the internal lottery result is a push order, the winning number used when performing the predetermined control is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the push order. Since it can be determined by whether or not the second internal winning command is transmitted, it is possible to simplify the processing and determine whether or not the winning number assigned to the non-pressing order is within a predetermined numerical range. The processing to be performed can be simplified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, in the internal winning command setting process, regardless of the gaming state, the same type of push order group (in this embodiment, the push order replay group, the push order bell For each group, the same winning number for transmission (in this embodiment, “2” for the push-order replay group and “31” for the push-bell group) is set. The second internal winning command including the credit winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. However, in the internal winning command setting process, the push order group in which the same transmitting winning number is set is at least Regardless of whether or not controlled by the AT, when the internal lottery result becomes a push order, it can be specified that the push order has been won, but a stop order advantageous to the player is specified For a group of the same type of push order that is subject to lottery in one game state, a plurality of roles are included so that each group includes one advantageous role for the player. It is good also as a structure which divides | segments into a group and sets the different winning number for transmission for every divided group. As a result, it is possible to specify on the sub-control unit 91 side whether or not the push order belonging to any one of the plurality of groups has been won, and to perform an effect corresponding to the specified group.

[Reel rotation control]
Next, the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the present embodiment are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R that are provided correspondingly. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are configured by a hybrid type stepping motor that makes one round in a cycle of 336 steps (0 to 335), and are based on phase signals output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on control by the main control unit 41. The excitation state of each excitation phase in the stepping motor (four phases φ1 to φ4 in this embodiment) is rotated by switching between excitation and non-excitation in a predetermined order.

  The main control unit 41 sets the number of steps when the reel reference position is detected by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R provided on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as 0, and rotates the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. To control. In the above-described main processing, an excitation pattern for rotating the reel in a predetermined manner is set, and in the above-described timer interrupt processing (main), the excitation pattern and the number of steps from the reel reference position are specified. A control signal indicating the excitation state of each excitation phase of the stepping motor is output to the motor drive circuit 45, and the phase signal indicating the excitation state based on the control signal is output by the motor drive circuit 45 to each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R. To output. Thereby, in each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R, the excitation state of the excitation phase of the reel motor is switched based on the phase signal and controlled to a predetermined rotation mode, and each reel 2L, 2C corresponding to the reel motor is controlled. 2R controls the rotation.

  The excitation pattern of the reel motor set by the main process by the main control unit 41 is not directly related to the game excitation pattern group for controlling the rotation of the reel according to the game progress status and the game progress status. For example, a non-game excitation pattern group for performing an effect using a reel is included, and these excitation patterns are predetermined in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Among the excitation patterns of the reel motor, the game excitation pattern group includes a start pattern for starting rotation of the reel in a stopped state and accelerating to a predetermined constant speed state, and a predetermined constant speed state. A constant speed pattern for continuing to rotate the reel accelerated to a constant speed state and a stop pattern for stopping the reel rotating at a predetermined constant speed state with a predetermined number of steps.

  In each excitation pattern, the excitation state (excitation, non-excitation) of each excitation phase of the reel motor is determined for each number of steps from the reference position of the reel. By switching to the excitation state determined in the order of the numbers, the rotation of the reels can be controlled in a predetermined rotation mode, and the main control unit 41 performs the reel motor for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. After the start pattern is set as the excitation pattern, the excitation pattern can be switched to a constant speed pattern to start rotation of the reel in a stopped state and perform start control to accelerate to a predetermined constant speed rotation. Constant speed rotation control that maintains the rotation of the reel at a constant speed is performed by repeatedly setting a constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern of the reel motor. It is possible to stop the reel at a predetermined stop position according to the timing when the stop switch is operated by switching the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the stop pattern at a predetermined timing for the reel where the stop switch is operated. It is possible to perform rotation stop control.

  Further, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is updated corresponding to the number of steps for exciting the reel motor, and is initialized every time the reel reference position is detected, so that each reel 2L, 2C, A step number counter for counting the number of steps after the reel reference position is detected for 2R is provided, and the value of the step number counter for the rotating reel is set to a predetermined number of steps (at least one revolution of the reel). Therefore, the main control unit 41 determines that a rotation abnormality has occurred for the reel, and the number of steps set is larger than the 336 steps required for the purpose. Reset the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the start pattern, and start the excitation of the reel motor from the beginning of the start pattern. Changes state, it is possible to restart the rotation of the reel.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24A, the main control unit 41 sets a start pattern as an excitation pattern of each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R as the game start operation is performed. The rotation of each reel is started by changing the excitation state of each excitation phase of each reel motor in the stopped state based on the start pattern. Further, when setting the start pattern as the excitation pattern, the step number counter is initialized and the step number counting is started. Then, by switching the excitation pattern from the start pattern to the constant speed pattern, the rotation of the reel is controlled to a predetermined constant speed rotation. Thereafter, when the reel is rotating normally, the reel reference position is detected by at least one turn of the reel before the step counter reaches the predetermined step number (for example, 400 steps). It will be. Then, for all the reels that are rotating, the activation condition for enabling the stop operation of the rotating reels is established by switching the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the constant speed pattern and detecting the reel reference position. It is determined that it has been established. As the validation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 validates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel, and the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, so that the corresponding reel The stop control is effectively received and the stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel is started.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24B, after starting the rotation of each of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32 in the stopped state, the main control unit 41 sets the reel reference position for at least one of the reels. If the step number counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps) without being detected, that is, the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position is detected is required for the reel to make one turn. When the number of steps is exceeded, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, restart control is performed, and for the corresponding reel, the excitation pattern of the reel motor is set as the start pattern again, The rotation is restarted by changing the excitation state of the reel motor from the beginning of the start pattern. When performing restart control, a step number counter is initialized. Thereafter, when the reel is normally rotated, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined step number (for example, 400 steps). Then, for all the rotating reels, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected, so that the conditions for enabling the reel stop operation are satisfied, and the main controller 41 Validates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel when the validation condition is satisfied.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, in a state where at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, for example, a momentary power failure occurs, and for a very short time. The rotation control of the reel is stopped, the reel is caught or slipped, the reel does not rotate normally, the reel reference position is not detected, and the step number counter is set to a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 Step), that is, when the number of steps since the previous reel reference position was detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the main control unit 41 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel. Judging and accepting the stop operation for all reels is invalidated. For reels for which the reel reference position has not been detected and it has been determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state, the step number counter is initialized and restart control is performed, and the reel motor is excited again from the beginning of the start pattern. By changing the state, the rotation of the reel is restarted. After that, when the reel rotates normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step counter reaches the predetermined number of steps after starting the change of the excitation state of the reel motor again by the start pattern. It will be. The excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels, so that the conditions for enabling the reel stop operation are satisfied, and the main control unit No. 41 validates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel when the validation condition is satisfied.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, for example, in a state where at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, for example, an instantaneous stop occurs and an extremely short time is reached. The rotation control of the reel is stopped, the reel is caught or slipped, the reel does not rotate normally, the reel reference position is not detected, and the step number counter is set to a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 If the step) is exceeded, the main control unit 41 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, invalidates the acceptance of the stop operation for all reels, and does not detect the reel reference position. For step 1, the step number counter is initialized and restart control is performed. If the reel that has been subjected to the restart control does not rotate normally and the step number counter exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the step number counter is initialized again and the restart control is repeated. Thereafter, when the reel reference position is not detected before the step number counter reaches the predetermined number of steps even though the reel is continuously controlled for a maximum of three times for the reel, All reels that are rotating are stopped, and error control for controlling to an error state is started to disable the progress of the game.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment includes a backup storage area that can hold the stored contents when power is supplied from the backup power source, and the power interruption is detected based on the output of the power interruption detection circuit 48. If detected, the control state of the main control unit 41 is stored in the backup storage area, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control state when the power interruption is detected is restored. Can be done. When at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed, and when a power interruption is detected in a state in which the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled for the reel, the control state of each reel is Data including the rotation state, the excitation pattern of each reel motor, and the like is stored in the backup storage area.

  When the main control unit 41 recovers from the power interruption by restarting the power supply to the slot machine 1, the power interruption is detected based on the control state stored in the backup storage area. For the reels that were rotating at the time, the excitation pattern at the time when power interruption was detected was set as the excitation pattern of the reel motor. Regardless of the state before disconnection, it returns as an invalid state. After that, various controls are performed based on the control state reset at the time of return.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27A, the main control unit 41 controls at least one of the reels to rotate at a constant speed, and turns on the power in a state where acceptance of the stop operation is enabled. When a break occurs and the power is restored from the power break, the constant speed pattern is set as the excitation pattern at the time of the power break, but the stop operation is accepted in an invalid state. Thereafter, by starting the rotation control of the reel, the excitation state of the corresponding reel motor is changed based on the constant speed pattern which is the excitation pattern set at the time of return. As a result, when the reel is rotated normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined step number (for example, 400 steps) for the rotating reel. The validation condition for accepting the stop operation is established. Then, when the conditions for enabling the acceptance of the stop operation are established for all the reels that are rotating, the acceptance of the stop operation is validated for all the reels that are rotating. When the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in this state, the stop operation is effectively received and the corresponding reels are controlled to stop.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27B, the reel rotation control is started by the constant speed pattern set at the time of return from the power interruption, but the reel motor torque is insufficient and the reel does not rotate normally. In this case, the reel reference position is not detected for the reel, and the step number counter exceeds the predetermined number of steps. In such a case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, the step number counter is initialized and the restart control is performed for the reel, and the excitation pattern of the reel motor is changed to the start pattern. The rotation of the reel is restarted by changing the excitation state of the reel motor from the beginning of the starting pattern. After that, when the restart control is performed, the reel is normally rotated, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern for all the rotating reels, and the stop operation is performed by detecting the reel reference position. Is satisfied, the acceptance of the stop operation of all the rotating reels is validated. On the other hand, if the reels do not rotate normally and the restart control is continuously performed a maximum of 3 times, but the reels do not rotate normally, all the rotating reels are stopped and an error occurs. Error control to control the state is started, and the progress of the game is disabled.

  In addition, when the plurality of reels are rotating, the main control unit 41 detects the reel reference position for the other reels when the step number counter exceeds a predetermined number of steps for any one of the reels. Regardless of whether or not the step number counter has exceeded a predetermined number of steps, the reels are controlled to be sequentially restarted from the reel. For example, for a plurality of reels, the reels are rotated at different timings. Even when an abnormality occurs in the state, the reels are sequentially restarted in order from the reel that has been previously determined to be abnormal in the rotation state without waiting for the reel to be restarted in which the abnormality in the rotation state is determined later.

  After starting the reel rotation, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment detects the reel reference position and the constant speed rotation for all the rotating reels, and the stop operation validation condition is satisfied. , While the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled for all the reels that are rotating, the reel reference position is detected for at least one of the reels after the rotation of the reels is started. If the number of steps after the start of rotation specified based on the step number counter or the previous reel reference position is detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps exceeding one reel, the reel It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the.

  In such a configuration, if an abnormality occurs even once in the rotation state of the reel, if it is determined that the rotation of the reel is abnormal and control is made to an error state to disable the progress of the game, the reel is temporarily Even in a situation where the rotation of the game is delayed and then the reel can be rotated normally, the progress of the game will be disabled, which will hinder the smooth progress of the game. There is.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, after starting the rotation of the reels, the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels, and the speed is changed to the constant speed rotation. In the established situation, when a reel rotation abnormality is determined, restart control is performed to restart the reel by changing the excitation state of the reel motor again by the start pattern that is the excitation pattern at the time of reel start. Each time it is determined that the rotation is abnormal, the progress of the game is not disabled and the game can proceed smoothly.

  In addition, since the stop operation acceptance is invalidated during the period from when it is determined that the rotation is abnormal to when the stop operation validation condition is satisfied after the restart control is performed, the reel is rotated in a situation where the reel rotation is not normal. It is possible to prevent the stop control from being executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the power interruption is caused and the power supply is stopped after the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, the control state before the power interruption is resumed when the power supply is resumed and the power supply is restored from the power interruption. From now on, control to change the excitation state of the reel motor is resumed. After that, when normal rotation is identified by detecting the reel reference position, the acceptance of the stop operation is validated from that time. Therefore, even if a momentary power failure or the like occurs, as long as normal rotation is maintained for the rotating reel, the game can proceed immediately after the power supply is resumed.

  In addition, when the power supply is stopped after the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, when the power supply is resumed, there is not enough torque to rotate the reel, and the reel does not rotate. Even if it is determined, restart control is performed for the reel, and the progress of the game is not immediately disabled. Therefore, the game can be smoothly advanced.

  Further, in such a case, after the power supply is resumed, it is determined that the reel rotation is abnormal and restart control is performed, and then the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels, and In the period until the validation condition is satisfied by shifting to constant speed rotation, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated, so that after the power supply resumes, the reel is in a situation where it is unknown whether the reel is rotating normally. It is possible to prevent the stop control from being executed.

  In this embodiment, the reel reference position is detected and the rotation of the reel shifts to the constant speed rotation, so that it is determined that the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, and the reel is operated at the constant speed. Although the rotation has not been reached, it is possible to prevent the stop control of the rotating reel from being executed by the stop operation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the restart control that changes the excitation state of the reel motor with the excitation pattern at the time of starting, the restart control is performed when the reel reference position is not detected and the validation condition for the stop operation is not satisfied. Is repeated and the restart control is performed a predetermined number of times (three times in the present embodiment), and if the enabling condition for the stop operation is not satisfied, the game is disabled by controlling to an error state. If the reel does not rotate normally even by restart control, that is, if the restart control does not solve the problem, the game can be disabled.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels in a state where the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, the restart control is sequentially performed from the reel in which the rotation abnormality is determined. Thus, even when rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels, each reel can be rotated normally at the earliest possible stage.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels in a state where the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 sequentially restarts the reels from which the rotation abnormality has been determined. For example, when a rotation abnormality of one of the reels is determined, the start control is repeated until a period during which the rotation abnormality of the remaining reels can be determined (a period corresponding to a predetermined number of steps) has elapsed. The configuration for delaying the start control, i.e., when the rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels in a state where the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, the reel restart control in which the rotation abnormality is determined earliest, A configuration may be adopted in which delay is delayed until the restart control of the reel that has been determined to have the latest rotation abnormality. If the rotation abnormality is judged by the timing also, it is possible to restart the plurality of reels rotation abnormality is judged at the same timing, the better is restarted when the appearance.

  In the present embodiment, when the reel reference position is not detected, the number of steps after the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position is detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps (400 steps) exceeding one reel. The reel rotation abnormality is specified, but the predetermined number of steps is larger than the number of steps required for one revolution of the reel, that is, the reel reference position is detected when the reel is rotating normally. Any value larger than the number of steps required to be performed is sufficient.

  In this embodiment, the reel reference position is not detected, and when the number of steps after the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position is detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the reel is restarted. If the stop operation validation condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), the reel rotation abnormality is judged to be invalid and the game is disabled. However, the stop operation validation condition is established. If not, if the control for restarting the reel is performed at least once, it is possible to prevent the game from being frequently disabled.

  In this embodiment, the reel reference position is detected after the start of rotation, and the stop operation is accepted by shifting to constant speed rotation. However, at least the reel reference position is detected. It is sufficient if the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the shift to the constant speed rotation is made depending on whether or not the number of steps from the start of the reel rotation is equal to or greater than the number of steps necessary to shift to the constant speed rotation. However, it is determined whether or not the rotation has shifted to the constant speed rotation by determining whether or not the constant speed is satisfied based on the number of steps or time until the next reel reference position is detected after the reel reference position is detected. It is good also as a structure to determine.

  Next, control related to navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment using the game auxiliary display 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the game auxiliary display 12 includes two indicators 12L and 12R that can turn on / off each of the first to eighth segments, and can display each segment in red. It is a vessel. Each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is driven by the LED drive circuit 47 based on the lighting mode data stored in a predetermined output buffer provided on the game control board 40, so that a predetermined lighting mode is obtained. It is controlled to be turned on or off. In addition, as the game auxiliary display 12, a display or a liquid crystal display capable of lighting each segment in any color such as white, pink, yellow, orange, red, green, blue, or a plurality of colors is used. It may be used.

  The main control unit 41 can set the navigation notification display data as the lighting mode data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to display the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and perform the navigation notification. . Further, by setting the payout number display data as the lighting mode data in the output buffer, it is possible to perform the payout number notification for displaying the number of medals awarded when the winning is generated on the game auxiliary display 12. By setting error display data as lighting mode data in the buffer, it is possible to perform error notification in which an error code indicating the content is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 when an error occurs.

  When the internal lottery is performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 refers to the result of the internal lottery set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and any of the special roles (BB1 to 5) is selected. In addition, it is determined whether or not a navigation notification implementation condition for a predetermined special role (in this embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 5 games) is established after the special role is won) is established. In the case where the execution condition for the special role navigation notification is satisfied, a flag indicating that the navigation notification is performed in accordance with the execution condition for the special role navigation notification is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Perform the push order command setting process The flag is referred to in the push order command setting process, and is the timing after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is established, and at the time when the winning special role can be won, that is, the internal When the result of the lottery is lost, the navigation number (10-14) that suggests the symbol that constitutes the winning special combination is set as the transmission navigation number.

  Then, after the push order command setting process is completed, the lighting mode data setting process of the game auxiliary display 12 is performed. In the setting process of the lighting mode data of the game auxiliary indicator 12, if the special role is not won or the execution condition is not satisfied, the predetermined setting area of the RAM 41c is set by the push order command transmission process described above. Then, with reference to the transmission navigation number ("0" to "9") that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification, the navigation notification display data corresponding to the transmission navigation number is set in the output buffer. On the other hand, when the special role is elected and the execution condition is established, the predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, “blue 7”, which is set by the push order command transmission process and is suggested by the navigation notification, is set. ”“ Red 7 ”symbol) is identified, and the navigation notification display data corresponding to the transmission navigation number is selected and set in the output buffer. .

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), when setting the navigation notification display data, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation notification display when the navigation number is the standard push order number “0” and no navigation notification is performed. By setting the initial value of the output buffer as data, that is, by initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and setting all the first to eighth segments of each display 12L, 12R to the off state, The display 12 is controlled to be non-displayed. In addition, the navigation number is one of the navigation numbers “1” to “9” other than the standard push order, and when performing the navigation notification, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on so that the number of the navigation number is displayed. In addition, the navigation notification display data in which the eighth segment of the display 12R is turned on and the other segments are turned off is set in the output buffer so that the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. To control. In addition, when a special role is won and the implementation conditions are met, if navigation notification display data including a navigation number that suggests a symbol corresponding to the special role is selected, the number of that navigation number The navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer so that each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on, the eighth segment of the display 12R is turned on, and the other segments are turned off. Thus, control is performed so that the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

  Thus, the segment that is lit for each stop order to be notified (left middle right, left / right middle, middle left / right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left, left first stop, middle first stop, right first stop). As the navigation combination is different, the navigation number is displayed in an identifiable manner based on the combination of segments that are lit. As a navigation notification, the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is added. Notification can be made using the display 12. In addition, when the special role is elected and the execution conditions are satisfied, the navigation number (“10” to “7”) suggesting the symbols (blue 7 and red 7) corresponding to the elected special role “14”) is displayed in a recognizable manner, and a predetermined symbol is suggested as a timing of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. The timing can be notified using the game auxiliary display 12. The main control unit 41 controls the eighth seg main of the display 12R together with the navigation number to turn on when performing the navigation notification, while turning off the eighth seg main of the display 12R when not performing the navigation notification. With this control, it can be recognized from the lighting state of the game auxiliary display 12 whether or not the navigation notification is being executed.

  In the navigation notification of this embodiment, the combination of segments corresponding to the navigation number is lit so that the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is the navigation number, but the game auxiliary display 12 is used as the navigation notification. The display mode may be a display mode that directly indicates the stop order, or it is not something that directly recalls the stop order, but immediately identifies the stop order from the combination of segments that are lit. The display mode may be difficult to identify without a correspondence table or the like.

  Specifically, as shown as Modification 1 in FIG. 30, for example, the reel number of the left reel 2L is “1”, the reel number of the middle reel 2C is “2”, and the reel number of the right reel 2R is “3”. By displaying the first stop reel number on one display 12L of the two game auxiliary indicators 12, and displaying the second stop reel number on the other indicator 12R (game auxiliary indicator) 12, for example, “21” is displayed to indicate that the stop order is middle left and right), and the stop order can be directly suggested as navigation notification. Although not shown, the blue 7 symbol is “b7”, the red 7 symbol is “r7”, and these “b7” and “r7” are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 so that the blue 7 and red 7 symbols are displayed. You may make it suggest a design.

  In addition, as shown as Modification 2 in FIG. 30, a combination of segments in which it is difficult to immediately identify the stop order in advance in the stop order (for example, as a combination of segments suggesting the stop order of left middle right, It is difficult to immediately identify the stop order by allocating the second segment of 12L, the fourth and sixth segment combinations of the display 12R, etc., and lighting the corresponding segment, but use a correspondence table or the like The order of stoppage can be suggested by the display mode that can be identified.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not a winning of any combination has occurred when the game is progressed and all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and the payout is made. If any winning combination (small role) has occurred, the number of medals to be paid out when the winning is generated is set in the output buffer as the payout number display data and is paid out to the game auxiliary display 12. The number of medals to be displayed is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (b), when the payout number display data is set in the output buffer, each segment of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is turned on so that the payout number of medals is displayed. By setting the payout number display data for turning off other segments including the segment in the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the payout number of medals. For example, when eight medals are paid out, the first to seventh segments of the display 12R are turned on, while the first to eighth segments of the display 12L and the eighth segment of the display 12R are turned off. Thereby, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, the eighth segment of the display 12R is controlled to be turned off, so that the lighting mode and the number of medals paid out in the navigation notification as described above. It becomes a lighting mode different from the lighting mode in the notification, so that it is not mistaken whether navigation notification is performed on the game auxiliary display 12 or the number of medals to be paid out is notified. Yes.

  When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment detects an error during the progress of the game, an error code (E1 to E8, see FIG. 31) predetermined according to the type of the error is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When a predetermined error display condition to be described later is satisfied (in this embodiment, when an error is detected during the reel rotation control, all reels are stopped and the reel rotation control is in progress. When an error is detected at other times, the error is detected when the error is detected), and error display data including the error code set in the RAM 41c is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when setting the error display data, the main control unit 41 turns on each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 so that the letters and numbers of the error code are displayed, and other segments. By setting the error display data for turning off the LED in the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display an error code that can identify the type of error detected. Then, when a predetermined error cancellation condition (see FIG. 31) defined in advance is satisfied, the output buffer is initialized and the display of the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 is ended. In the error display data, the first, second, fourth, fifth, and seventh segments of the display 12L are turned on to display the letter “E” and correspond to the number of the error code among the segments of the display 12R. While the segment is turned on, the other segments of the indicators 12L and 12R are turned off. Thereby, when displaying an error code on the game auxiliary display 12, the lighting mode is controlled so that the alphabet "E" that is not displayed is displayed on the display 12L in the navigation notification and the payout number display. Therefore, the lighting mode at the time of notifying the error code is a lighting mode different from the lighting mode at the navigation notification and the lighting mode at the notification of the number of payout medals, and is the error code notified by the game auxiliary display 12? Thus, it is possible to prevent misconception that the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals to be paid out are performed.

  Next, the timing at which the main control unit 41 switches the lighting mode of the game auxiliary indicator 12 according to the progress of the game or the like will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and sets the game auxiliary display when one or more bets are set to start the game. All the segments of the device 12 are turned off and controlled to be hidden. Then, a start operation is performed in a state where the specified number of bets is set, thereby starting rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game. At this time, the navigation number “0” in the standard push order is set with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When no navigation notification is performed, all segments of the game auxiliary display 12 are turned off. maintain. Then, after the third stop operation is performed, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if any winning of any small role has occurred, the number of medals to be paid out by winning Is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as payout number display data, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Then, by setting a bet number of 1 or more to start the next game, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized again, and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. Thereby, in a game that does not perform navigation notification, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be non-displayed over a period from when a bet number of 1 or more is set to when a payout of medals is started by winning. When all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started, a bet number of 1 or more is set or a waiting condition (no operation for a certain period of time, settlement operation is performed) In the period from the establishment to the standby state, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the number of medals as a payout number display. When the third stop operation is performed and all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if the re-game player has won a prize and if no win has occurred, the game assistance By not setting the number-of-payout display data in the output buffer of the display device 12, one or more bets are set in order to keep the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 hidden and start one game. The lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be non-displayed over a period from time until the time when the bet amount is set to start the next game, that is, over all the periods in one game.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), when performing the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 performs the start operation in a state where the specified number of bets is set, and then the reel 2L related to the game. When starting the rotation control of 2C, 2R, with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, one of the navigation numbers “1” to “9” is set as the transmission navigation number by the above-described push order command transmission processing. If the navigation conditions for special role navigation notification are satisfied and any of navigation numbers “10” to “13” is set as the transmission navigation number, the corresponding navigation number is The navigation notification display data to be displayed is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Thereafter, the stop switch for the third stop is operated, and when the stop switch is released, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized and the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. And then wait for a predetermined waiting period. Then, after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not a prize for any small role has occurred. If a prize for a small role has occurred, the number of medals to be paid out by winning is determined. The payout number display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, in a game that performs navigation notification, the game auxiliary indicator 12 is displayed over a period from when the reel starts rotating with the start of the game until when the stop switch of the third stop operation is released. Control is performed so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as navigation notification. When the output buffer is initialized, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is once controlled to be non-displayed, and then all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started. From then on, control is performed so that the number of medals is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 as a payout number display over a period from when one or more bets are set.

  Further, as described above (see FIG. 25), the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls at least one of the reels to rotate at a constant speed, and in a state where the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotating state of the rotating reels, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated for all reels, and the reels that are determined to be abnormal are restarted. Perform restart control. Thereafter, when all the rotating reels are normally rotated, the acceptance of the stop operation is re-enabled. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the case of performing the navigation notification, when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started, the navigation notification is given to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. When the display data is set and then the third stop stop switch is released, the output buffer is initialized. As a result, in the case of performing the navigation notification, the acceptance of the stop operation is effective during the period from when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started to when the third stop stop switch is released. The navigation number display on the game auxiliary display 12 is continued regardless of whether it is disabled or disabled.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the main control unit 41 transmits the above-described push order command to the sub-control unit 91 when a game start operation is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the navigation number based on the push order command, and when the navigation notification is specified based on the navigation number, it is specified based on the navigation number. A navigation effect suggesting an advantageous operation mode is executed. In the navigation effect, for example, a number indicating the stop order based on the navigation number is displayed at a position corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R on the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, or the timing of the stop operation based on the navigation number. By displaying an image that suggests (for example, an image of “red 7” or the like) in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, an advantageous operation mode is suggested.

  In the present embodiment, when performing a navigation effect, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to start the navigation effect when a push order command is received. For example, a reel acceleration information command indicating that rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is to be started at the start of the game is received as long as the stop operation of the stop switch is enabled on the control unit 41 side. Even if the timing or the timing within the period after receiving the acceleration completion command indicating that the control for accelerating the reel to the predetermined constant speed rotation is completed with the start of the game after receiving the push order command, etc. good. In particular, when the stop operation is validated, the navigation notification is performed by starting the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side and starting the navigation effect on the sub control unit 91 side. Even if it is in the state, since the navigation notification and the navigation effect do not suggest winning of the push order during the period from when the start operation is performed until when the stop operation is validated, It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the role won in the lottery. In particular, after starting the rotation of the reel related to the game, the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side is started and the navigation effect on the sub control unit 91 side is started. In the period from when the start operation is performed until the reel rotation control for the game is started, the main control unit 41 controls the freeze state to delay the progress of the game, and the reel effect using the reel in the freeze state In the period from the start operation to the start of reel rotation control related to the game, that is, the period controlled by the freeze state, by the navigation notification and the navigation effect. Since there is no suggestion of winning the role, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the winning role in the internal lottery over the period. That.

  In addition, after starting the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment ends the navigation notification when the stop switch for the third stop operation is released, and sends a game end command to the sub control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 can end the navigation effect when the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side is ended based on the reception of the game end command. The navigation effect only needs to be performed when the game result changes at least according to the stop order. For example, the stop switch in the stop order other than the stop order suggested by the navigation notification and the navigation effect is operated. If it is determined that the winning combination will not win, the first stop operation or the second stop operation will be performed, and only one winning combination will be determined. Before the navigation notification is terminated by-in control unit 41 side, it may be configured such that the navigation performance is terminated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the navigation effect from being continued even after the game result is confirmed.

  Even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can hold the stored content by supplying power from the backup power source. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power interruption is detected based on the output of the power interruption detection circuit 48, the control state in the main control unit 41 set in the RAM 41c is changed to the power interruption. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started after that, the control is started in the control state when the power interruption is detected. Can be done.

  As shown in FIG. 33, when the main control unit 41 controls the rotation of at least one reel as the game progresses, and performs navigation notification to the game auxiliary display 12, power interruption occurs. When detected, the control related to the power interruption is performed, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be non-display, and the rotation control is performed. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, the control state including the excitation pattern of the reel motor of the reel, the number of steps of excitation control, the navigation number, and the like can be restored with the contents when the power interruption is detected. Perform the power interruption process as possible.

  After that, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the control state of the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power interruption, the power is stored in the RAM 41c when the power interruption is detected. The control state before power interruption is restored based on the control state, but the acceptance state of the stop operation by all stop switches in the control state is changed to invalid and set. As a result, the main control unit 41 returns in a state where acceptance of stop operations by all stop switches is invalidated.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 returns the control state to the state before the power interruption, the navigation number, the excitation pattern of the reel motor of each reel, and the number of steps are stored in the RAM 41c when the power interruption is detected. It returns with what was done. When returning, the control state on the main control unit 41 side including the return command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power interruption and the push order command that can specify the navigation number is displayed. Various identifiable commands are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. After that, the same control as that at the start of the above-mentioned game is executed, and the control for advancing the game based on the control state set in the RAM 41c is performed, so that the navigation number set in the RAM 41c is used. Then, the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation number display on the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to resume, and then the reel motor excitation pattern set in the RAM 41c, that is, Based on the constant speed pattern, the reel motor whose rotation was controlled before power interruption is excited from the number of steps of the excitation pattern when power interruption is detected, and the corresponding reel is again rotated at a predetermined constant speed. When the reel is controlled to rotate and the reel reaches a predetermined constant speed, the stop operation of the corresponding reel is accepted by the stop switch. Performs control to activate.

  At this time, in the control of rotating the corresponding reel again at a predetermined constant speed rotation, the rotation control of the corresponding reel motor is performed based on the constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern set when the power interruption is detected. In such a case, as described above (see FIGS. 27A and 27B), the corresponding reel is normally rotated depending on the state of the corresponding reel (rotated state or stopped state). In some cases, the reels may not be rotated normally, and when the reels are not rotated normally, restart control is performed to rotate the corresponding reels normally.

  When the reel is rotated normally and when it is rotated normally by restart control, when the reel is rotated at a predetermined constant speed, the corresponding reel Enables the acceptance of stop operation by the stop switch. After that, the system waits until the stop switch whose reception is enabled is operated, and performs control to stop the corresponding reel when the stop switch is operated.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 receives the return order command after returning from the power interruption, and then receives the press order command. Based on the navigation number specified by the press order command, the main control unit 91 When it is determined that the navigation notification is performed on the 41 side, the navigation effect that can specify the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player based on the navigation number is resumed. Thereafter, the effect is controlled based on various commands received in accordance with the progress of the game. As a result, the main control unit 41 recovers from the power interruption, transmits a push order command, etc., then restarts the rotation control of the reels, and the corresponding reels are rotated at a constant speed. The sub-control unit 91 resumes the navigation effect when receiving the push order command after returning from the power interruption, so that the sub-control unit 91 performs the main control unit 41. When the stop operation is validated on the side, it is possible to make a state in which a navigation effect is already being performed.

  As described above, when the power interruption is detected, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and controls the game auxiliary display 12 to be hidden. In the period from when the power is detected until the power supply to the slot machine 1 is completely stopped, the navigation number by navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. When power interruption is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the main control unit 41 returns, the navigation notification is displayed on the output buffer. Since the control is performed so that the data is reset, the navigation number by the navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 over a period from when the power supply is resumed until when the main control unit 41 returns. It is like that.

  Further, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the main control unit 41 returns, the main control unit 41 resets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and then When the reel that has been controlled for rotation when power interruption is detected is rotated again at a predetermined constant speed, and the corresponding reel is rotated at a constant speed, the stop operation by the stop switch of the reel is performed. Since the control is made to enable the acceptance of the game machine, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, the game auxiliary display 12 starts displaying the navigation number by the navigation notification and then stops by the stop switch. The acceptance of the operation is validated, and the acceptance of the stop operation is validated in the state where the navigation number is already displayed.

  Further, the main control unit 41 detects a power interruption when performing the rotation control of the reel, and thereafter, when returning from the power interruption, the main control unit 41 executes a process common to that at the start of the game and is set at the time of the return. The progress of the game is controlled based on the control state.

  As a conventional slot machine, a game control means for controlling a game and an effect control means for effect control are provided, and notification of an operation mode advantageous to the player is performed by an information means controlled by the game control means side. There was a document (for example, Japanese Patent No. 5770922) that disclosed what was made. In the slot machine described in this document, when a power interruption occurs while the game control means is informing of an advantageous operation mode, an advantageous operation mode is notified even after the interruption is restored. However, if the stop operation is activated before the notification of the advantageous operation mode returns after the interruption of power interruption, the stop operation may be performed in an operation mode different from the notified advantageous operation mode. is there. The present embodiment has been made paying attention to such problems, and provides a slot machine that can prevent the player from operating in an operation mode different from the operation mode informed. Objective.

  Specifically, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that controls a game and a sub-control unit 91 that controls an effect. The game auxiliary display 12 to be controlled is capable of performing navigation notification for notifying an operation mode advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, when a power interruption occurs in the state where the navigation notification is performed on the game auxiliary indicator 12, the navigation notification is performed even after the power interruption is restored. If the configuration is such that the stop operation is validated before the navigation notification returns, the stop operation may be performed in an operation mode different from the advantageous operation mode to be notified.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform navigation notification for notifying an operation mode advantageous to the player on the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41 side. Yes, after the reel rotation control is started at the start of the game, the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted in a state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, while the predetermined activation condition is satisfied In addition, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power supply is resumed in the state where the navigation notification is being performed, in a period from when the power supply is resumed until a predetermined activation condition is satisfied. , Stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is not accepted, navigation notification is resumed on the game auxiliary display 12, and after the predetermined enabling condition is satisfied, Since the stop operation by the switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted, the activation condition after the power supply is resumed when the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped in a state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. The stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is not accepted during the period until is established, and after the power supply is resumed, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped in a situation where it is unknown whether the rotation is normal. Can be prevented. Further, when the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped in a state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is being performed, the timing is earlier than the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Since the navigation notification is resumed at this time, the stop switches 8L and 8C are erroneously operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the player is notified of the advantageous operation mode by performing the navigation notification. , 8R can be prevented from being operated.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment displays, as predetermined contents, the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role, and the error that has occurred, on the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41. It is possible to display an error code indicating the content, and to display a navigation number that can identify an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player as display content different from the predetermined content on the game auxiliary display 12 Therefore, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side, a new display is made by displaying the navigation number using a display means for displaying a predetermined content. Without providing means, it is possible to display the predetermined contents and the navigation number.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment resumes power supply after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in a state where a predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is performed. Thus, when the main control unit 41 returns to the state before the power interruption, after the navigation notification is resumed, the rotation of the reel is controlled for the rotation when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. The control is resumed. After the power supply is resumed, the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 in the same display mode as when the power supply is stopped regardless of the reel stop state. Thus, since the advantageous operation mode is notified, it is possible to simplify the control related to the resumption of the control for notifying the advantageous operation mode by the navigation notification.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 uses a plurality of different operation timings (“Blue 7”, “Red 7”, “White 7”, “BAR”) as an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player. An operation mode operated at any one of the operation timings (timing to stop by LN), and an operation mode operated in any one of the multiple operation orders (eg, left middle right, left / right middle operation order, etc.) Although it is the structure which alert | reports by navigation alerting | reporting, the structure which alert | reports the operation aspect etc. by these combination may be sufficient.

  When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the reel rotation control with the start of the game, the main control unit 41 starts the navigation notification that notifies the player of the advantageous operation mode, and then the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Since the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted in this state, the navigation notification is started at a timing earlier than a predetermined activation condition is satisfied after the game starts, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being erroneously operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the operation mode has been notified.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 starts the navigation notification that notifies the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player when the reel rotation control is started at the start of the game, and then performs predetermined activation. The configuration is such that the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted in a state where the condition is satisfied, but any configuration may be used as long as the navigation notification is started after the start of the game until the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, For example, the navigation notification may be started when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, or a predetermined effective state from when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The configuration may be such that navigation notification is started at any timing within the period until the activation condition is satisfied. Even in such a configuration, after the game is started, navigation notification is started at a timing earlier than a predetermined activation condition is satisfied, so that it is not known that an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player is notified. It is possible to prevent the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being erroneously operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment invalidates the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R when the abnormality is detected in the rotation state of the reel after a predetermined activation condition is satisfied, and again the predetermined control condition is satisfied. When the activation condition is satisfied, the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated. On the other hand, after the navigation notification is started, even if an abnormality is detected in the rotation state of the reel, the navigation Since the notification of the advantageous operation mode by the notification is continued, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are erroneously operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player is notified. Can be prevented.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can transmit to the sub control unit 91 a push order command that can specify an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player, whereas the sub control unit 91 Using a liquid crystal display 51 that is controlled on the sub-control unit 91 side when a navigation effect that can identify an advantageous operation mode can be executed based on the command and navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side. Since it is possible to notify the advantageous operation mode, it is possible to enhance the effect of producing the advantageous operation mode.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restarts the power supply after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in a state in which the validation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is performed, and the main control is resumed. When the unit 41 returns to the state before the power interruption, the navigation notification is resumed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Thereafter, the reel rotation control is started, and the predetermined validation is performed. Since the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated when the condition is established, a push order command that can specify an advantageous operation mode at an earlier timing than the validation condition is established is a sub-control unit 91. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed on the sub-control unit 91 side, the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective. The navigation effect can be started before the player operates, and the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is erroneously operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the advantageous operation mode is notified. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started again, the power interruption is detected when the control state in the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power interruption. This is a configuration for returning to the control state before the power interruption based on the control state stored in the RAM 41c, especially for reels that have been controlled for rotation before the power interruption. The motor is restored with the excitation pattern and the number of steps set. When returning from power interruption, the excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the excitation pattern at the time of power interruption, that is, the constant speed pattern and the number of steps. If the reel does not rotate normally after the reels are controlled to resume rotation, reset the excitation pattern of the corresponding reel to the start pattern and restart the rotation. The main control unit 41 is configured to perform the restart control. When the power supply is stopped and the power supply is restarted in a state in which one of the reels is rotationally controlled before the power interruption, When returning to the control state before the disconnection, the reel motor excitation pattern may be set as the start pattern for the corresponding reel.

  Specifically, the main control unit 41 selects the excitation pattern of the reel motor in the order of the start pattern, the constant speed pattern, and the stop pattern when performing normal game control. As shown in (a), a start pattern is selected on the condition that a valid start switch 7 has been operated, and the reel in a stopped state is started and accelerated to a predetermined constant speed rotation. Then, a constant speed pattern is selected and the reel is rotated at a predetermined constant speed. Then, in this state, a stop pattern is selected for the reel corresponding to the stop switch operated on condition that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, according to the number of sliding frames, and the stop switch is operated. The reel is stopped at the stop position corresponding to the operation of the stop switch within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms in the present embodiment). After that, the main control unit 41 does not select the excitation pattern until the next game is started and maintains the reel in a stopped state, as shown in FIG. The rotation of the reel is controlled by the above, and when the reel is stopped during the start due to the power interruption, the start pattern selected at the time of the power interruption is used when returning from the power interruption. By changing the excitation state from the first step of the starting pattern, it is possible to start the reel without temporarily turning the reel into a normal state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the rotation of the reel is controlled by a constant speed pattern before the power interruption, and when the reel is stopped during the start due to the power interruption, When returning, the excitation pattern is changed from the constant speed pattern that was selected at the time of power interruption to the start pattern, and the excitation state is changed from the first step of the start pattern so that the reel does not rotate normally once The reel can be started without.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), control is performed to stop the rotation of the reel by a stop pattern before power interruption, and when the reel is stopped during the control to stop by power interruption, When returning from a power interruption, using the stop pattern selected at the time of power interruption, changing the excitation state from the number of steps at the time of power interruption in that stop pattern, the stop pattern that was being executed at the time of power interruption By executing continuously, the stop pattern executed at the time of power interruption is executed to the end within a specific time (190 ms in this embodiment) except for the time during power interruption after starting before power interruption. Can do.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can detect occurrence of various errors relating to the game, such as an error relating to medal payout, an error relating to insertion of a medal, an error relating to rotation of a reel, in the main process or timer interruption process (main). When a predetermined error display condition is satisfied after detecting various errors as described above, an error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. The predetermined error display condition is that when various errors are detected in a state where the reel is not rotationally controlled with the game, the error is detected, and various errors are detected while the reel is rotationally controlled. The case is when all reels are stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs navigation notification by setting navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary indicator 12 at the start of the game as described above, and then The output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 uses the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning status when the predetermined standby period has passed since the stop switch where the 3 stop operation was performed is used as the payout number display data. And the number of medals to be paid out is displayed. In such a configuration, when the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation notification is started, the stop switch in which the third stop operation has been performed is released, and further a predetermined standby If various errors relating to the game, especially errors relating to the insertion of medals, and errors relating to the rotation of the reel are detected in the restriction period until the period elapses, the control relating to the game is continued until the above restriction period elapses. When the limit period has elapsed, an error code indicating the content of the detected error is set as error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 After starting, control to the error state.

  Thereafter, when a release condition (for example, operation of the reset switch 23 in a predetermined procedure) according to the type of the detected abnormality is satisfied, the game control is resumed from the time before the error state control is started. . By resuming the control of the game, it is determined whether the control after the third stop operation has been performed and the predetermined period has elapsed, that is, whether or not any small role winning has occurred. When a winning combination has occurred, the number of medals to be paid out by winning is set as output number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Let

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment sets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and performs various types of errors when detected. By setting error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the navigation notification is terminated and a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the error notification is performed during the period from the start of the navigation notification to the end. Is supposed to limit what happens.

  A conventional slot machine includes a main control unit that performs control related to the progress of a game and a sub-control unit that performs control related to performance. The main control unit is configured to generate a medal number to be paid out to a player or when an error related to a game occurs. It is provided with a game auxiliary indicator capable of displaying an error code indicating its contents, and it is possible to transmit a command capable of specifying the internal lottery result to the sub-control unit. According to the internal lottery result specified based on the command, an operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like provided in the sub-control unit and notified.

  In such a configuration, an advantageous operation mode cannot be specified due to a problem in the sub-control unit or the liquid crystal display, and there is a possibility that a disadvantage may be caused to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 side In addition to performing control to display an advantageous operation mode, an advantageous operation mode is displayed using the game auxiliary display 12 on which the number of medals to be paid out to the player is displayed. When the number of medals to be paid out and the operation mode advantageous to the player are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 included in the main control unit 41, the number of medals to be paid out to the player on one display and the player Since advantageous operation modes are both displayed, there is a risk of misrecognizing the display contents when the display at that time is switched.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display a game assistance amount that can display the number of medals to be paid out to the player as predetermined contents and an error code indicating the contents when an error relating to the game occurs. A display device 12 is provided, and the game auxiliary display device 12 displays a navigation number that can identify an advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of a stop switch that is advantageous to the player as display content different from the predetermined content. It is possible, and after displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and displaying the payout number of medals as the predetermined content, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is once initialized and hidden. Since the predetermined contents are displayed, a new display means is provided when the navigation number is displayed on the display directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side. In addition, by displaying the navigation number using the game auxiliary display 12 that displays the number of medals to be paid out as the predetermined content, the predetermined content and the navigation number can be displayed and the game auxiliary display 12 can be navigated to. When displaying the predetermined contents after displaying the number, the display contents displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 are displayed because the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 are once initialized and hidden to display the predetermined contents. Can be prevented from being misidentified as a navigation number or a predetermined content.

  When the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displays the payout number of medals as the predetermined content, the main control unit 41 temporarily initializes the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 and hides it. It is sufficient that the predetermined content is displayed after the state is set to the above state, and the period during which the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed may be a period at which the player or the like can recognize at least that the display has been turned off. In the present embodiment, there is provided a predetermined standby period in which the main control unit 41 waits after initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and after the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the predetermined content is displayed. When the medal payout number is displayed, the game auxiliary display 12 is surely controlled to be hidden.

  In addition, when the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and displays the number of medals to be paid out as the predetermined content, the predetermined standby period for waiting is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. It is sufficient that the mode is a period in which the player or the like can recognize at least that the lamp has been turned off while switching from the navigation notification to the notification of the number of payouts. By doing so, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed and the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched. Therefore, the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily switched between the navigation notification and the payout number notification. It can be controlled to be turned off. Further, for example, when the stop switch for the third stop is operated and the stop switch is released, the timer is activated, and the predetermined time is counted by the timer. The game auxiliary display 12 may be configured to be temporarily turned off while switching from navigation notification to notification of the number of payouts by waiting for a standby period.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment provides the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the third stop switch is operated when the game auxiliary display 12 performs navigation notification. Once the game is initialized, the payout number display data is set in the output buffer, so that the display mode of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is temporarily controlled to be turned off while the navigation notification is switched to the notification of the payout number. Although there is a display not related to the game (for example, “-”, “_”, etc.) while switching from the navigation notification to the notification of the number of payouts, the display content of the navigation notification and the notification of the number of payouts are displayed. The content can be prevented from being mistaken.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment temporarily displays the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 when displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displaying the number of medals paid out as the predetermined content. The display amount of the medals is displayed by setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 after the display is made non-displayed, and the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily initialized. When the payout number display data is set, the data is displayed to display the total number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of a small role. The total number of medals to be paid out is displayed over the period until the game is completed, but the main control unit 41 displays the number of medals paid out on the game auxiliary display 12. After setting data for displaying 0 sheets as initial data of the payout number display data, each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c, the payout number display data of the payout medal is displayed. A configuration in which the total number of medals that have been paid out is sequentially displayed and updated to the total number of medals, and finally the total number of medals paid out as a result of winning a small role is displayed. It may be. In such a configuration as well, in the same manner as in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and then the payout number of medals is displayed as the predetermined content, the display on the game auxiliary display 12 By initializing the contents and setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, whether the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content, Can be prevented from being mistaken.

  When displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c. And in the structure which controls to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, the data which shows 0 sheets as the initial data of the payout number display data and hides the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is set. Thereafter, the payout sensor 34c may be controlled to update so that the payout number display data is incremented by one each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. With such a configuration, the period from when the medal payout is started with the winning of the small role until the first medal payout is detected, that is, the number of paid out medals is 0. During a certain period, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be non-displayed, and after that, when the payout of the first medal is detected, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed and the total number of medals for which payout has been completed. When the number of medals is displayed as the predetermined content after the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the navigation number is displayed as the display content of the game auxiliary display 12. After the display, the hidden number of medals is once displayed, and the medal payout number is displayed. The same effect as the configuration of the present embodiment is obtained, and the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. Or a bicycloalkyl number, or a predetermined content, can be prevented from being misidentified.

  When displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Then, in the configuration that controls to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, when the navigation notification is terminated and a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, 0 is displayed as initial data of the payout number display data. Data is set so that the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed, and thereafter, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is updated so as to be incremented by one. It is good also as a structure. By adopting such a configuration, a period until a predetermined waiting time elapses after navigation notification is ended and initial data of the payout number display data is set by the payout sensor 34c. During the period from when the payout is detected to when the payout number display data is updated, the display of the game auxiliary display 12 can be in a non-display state, and the same effect as the configuration of the present embodiment can be achieved. It can be prevented that the display content displayed on the display device 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content.

  When displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c. And in the structure which controls to update the display of the game auxiliary indicator 12, the display content of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is initialized by initializing the navigation notification display data when the third stop operation is performed. Is temporarily hidden, and when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed after the navigation notification display data is initialized, 0 is displayed as initial data of the payout number display data and the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed. Then, each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c, the payout number display data is updated to be incremented by one. It may be configured. By adopting such a configuration, a period in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is ended, and a predetermined waiting time elapses after the navigation notification display data is initialized. The game auxiliary display 12 has a period and a period from when initial data of the payout number display data is set to when the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of the first medal and the payout number display data is updated. The display can be made in a non-display state, and the same effect as the configuration of the present embodiment can be obtained, and it is misidentified whether the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content. Can be prevented. It should be noted that during these periods, that is, a period in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is terminated, a period from when the navigation notification display data is initialized until a predetermined waiting time elapses, a payout By applying only one of the periods from when the initial data of the number display data is set to when the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of the first medal and the payout number display data is updated. After the navigation notification is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, it may be in a non-display state, and the payout number of medals may be displayed, or any two of these periods may be displayed. The structure to apply may be sufficient.

  When displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Thus, in the configuration in which the display of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be updated, “1” to “9” can be displayed as display modes of the payout number on the game auxiliary display 12. A part of the display mode in the notification (navigation numbers “1” to “13” and “.”) Is included in the display mode of the payout number. However, when the displays on the two indicators 12L and 12R are integrated, for example, in navigation notification, the eighth segment of the indicator 12R and the indicators 12L and 12R corresponding to the navigation number are used. of While the first to seventh segments are turned on, in the payout number display, only the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R corresponding to the payout number are turned on, so that the display contents and payout of the navigation notification are displayed. It is possible to prevent the display content of the number notification from being misidentified.

  After starting the game, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment starts from the start of the control of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed until the stop switch of the third stop operation is released. Since the navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 over the period of time, the period from the start to the end of the game Thus, the player can be made to recognize an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 starts the third stop operation from the start of the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed from the start of the game to the end of the game. The navigation number is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period until the stop switch is released. However, as the game starts, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed as the game progresses. The navigation number is continued on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period from one start timing until the operation becomes effective until one end timing after the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated as the game ends. For example, the start switch 7 is operated with a specified number of bets set at the start of the game. When starting the control to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined constant speed, the game ends from one of the start timings when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective. Sometimes, for example, when the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, when the payout of medals is started or ended in accordance with winning, the next game Therefore, the navigation number may be continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period up to any one end timing when the betting number setting operation is performed.

  Among such configurations, in particular, the control of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed when the start switch 7 is operated with a specified number of bets set at a start timing. By starting any of the above, the navigation number display on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective. In addition, one start timing is any one of when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled when starting the control of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed, For example, during the period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started at a predetermined constant speed, a reel effect that rotates the reels in a manner different from that of the normal game, etc. Even if it is configured to perform or is controlled to a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined time, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started after the reel production or the freeze state is finished, It is possible to restrict the navigation number from being displayed during the period during which the reel effect is performed. In addition, when one start timing is set when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective, an event that occurs during the period until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective, for example, The display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is started at a predetermined timing at the start of the game, regardless of whether or not the reel re-acceleration or the re-acceleration of the reel accompanying the return from power interruption occurs. be able to.

  In particular, when one stop timing is set when the stop switch for the third stop operation is pressed, all the reels 2L, 2C, Since the display content on the game auxiliary display 12 can be hidden during the period from when 2R stops until the winning determination is made, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with winning, It is possible to prevent the number and the number of payouts from being misidentified.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is information relating to the result of the game as a predetermined content, and is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 used to display the number of medals to be paid out to the player when a winning occurs at the end of the game. The navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch advantageous to the player is displayed as the display content different from the predetermined content, and the stop switch advantageous to the player is displayed. While the advantageous operation mode is displayed during the game, the payout number as a predetermined content is displayed after the game is over, so that the display period of the navigation number and the payout number display period overlap in the game auxiliary display 12. You do n’t have to.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment causes the game auxiliary display 12 to display a navigation number that can identify a stop mode that is advantageous to the player and the number of medals to be paid out when winning a small role. The display mode of the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the number of paid-out medals do not include a common mode. It can be prevented that the payout number is displayed as the content.

  In addition, the display mode of the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the number of paid-out medals are obtained when the display on the two displays 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is integrated. In addition, any configuration that does not include a common mode may be used. For example, the display mode of the navigation number may include a configuration that includes a part of the display mode of the number of payouts and vice versa.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the number of medals to be paid out in a part of the display mode (navigation numbers “1” to “13” and “.”) Of the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification. The display mode (for example, “8” when paying out 8 cards) is included, but the display mode by navigation notification is the display mode for the number of medals to be paid out (for example, “8” when paying out 8 cards). It is good also as a structure which does not contain. By adopting such a configuration, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is not controlled to the same mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals, and the display mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals to be paid out. It is possible to prevent the display mode from being misidentified.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 turns on the eighth segment of the display 12L in the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification, while in the display mode that notifies the number of medals to be paid out. By turning off the eighth segment of the indicator 12, the display mode of one of the two indicators 12L and 12R informs the display mode of the navigation notification or the number of medals to be paid out. The display mode can be identified, but when the display mode of at least two indicators 12L and 12R is viewed as a unit, the display mode by navigation notification and the display mode by notification of the number of medals to be paid out are identified. A possible configuration is also possible. As such a configuration, for example, when the navigation number “8” is notified in the navigation notification, “−8” is displayed as an integrated display by displaying “8” on the display 12L and “−” on the display 12R. On the other hand, in the notification of the number of medals to be paid out, “8” is displayed on the display 12L and “8” is displayed on the display 12R so that “8” is displayed as an integrated display. Thus, it is possible to prevent the display mode based on the navigation notification and the display mode based on the notification of the number of medals to be paid out from being misidentified.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 while the navigation assistance display 12 is displaying the navigation number as an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player, Is detected, the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 are hidden by initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the main It is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 when the operation of the control unit 41 or the like becomes unstable.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when power interruption is detected in a state where the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Although it is the structure which controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to non-display, it may be the structure which controls the game auxiliary display 12 to non-display when a power interruption is detected. Based on the set data, by clearing the output port that outputs a control signal to the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. The display of the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed by limiting the output of the drive signal output to the game auxiliary display 12 from the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12. A structure for controlling or. Even in such a configuration, similarly to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display device 12 during power interruption.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the reels to a predetermined constant speed with the progress of the game, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid, and the game auxiliary display 12 has a game. The power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in a state in which the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the user is displayed, and the state before the power interruption is resumed. When returning, after the navigation number is displayed again on the game auxiliary indicator 12, when the reel whose rotation has been controlled before power interruption becomes constant speed rotation, the operation of the stop switch of the corresponding reel is accepted. By controlling to enable, when returning from the power interruption, the navigation number display on the game auxiliary display 12 can be resumed before the stop switch operation acceptance becomes valid. What it can be prevented stop switch in operation mode other than the preferred operating mode suggested from being operated by the navigation ID.

  When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment returns the control state to the state before the power interruption, the main switch 41 returns the operation acceptance state of the stop switch and the reel excitation pattern to the state before the power interruption. At the time of return of the control unit 41, the operation of the stop switch is validated and the rotation control of the reel is started with the excitation pattern before power interruption. Rotation control will be started by an excitation pattern, that is, a constant speed pattern for rotating at a constant speed rotation, but in order to start rotation of a stopped reel, torque is insufficient and rotation does not start. After starting the reel rotation control, the reel sensor detects the reference position for a predetermined period (based on the reel sensor when the reel is rotated). When a period longer than the time required to detect the position) has elapsed, it is determined as a reel rotation error, the stop switch operation acceptance is invalidated, and the excitation pattern is accelerated to accelerate from the stopped state. Since the reel rotation control is started again after the change, the reel can be accelerated to a predetermined constant speed. Then, the operation acceptance of the stop switch that has been invalidated due to the determination that the reel rotation error has occurred can be validated again when the reel is accelerated to a predetermined constant speed. In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the main control unit 41 is restored, the navigation notification display data is reset in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the slot machine When the power supply to 1 is resumed, after the display of the navigation number by the navigation notification is started on the game auxiliary display 12, the stop operation acceptance by the stop switch can be validated, and the player can When the stop operation by the stop switch can be performed, the navigation number can be surely displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to perform the navigation notification. Further, in such a configuration, when the main control unit 41 returns, the stop operation by the stop switch is once validated and then invalidated, and then the reel rotation control is performed again. When the reel rotates at a constant speed, the stop operation by the stop switch is re-enabled, but when the main control unit 41 returns, the navigation notification display data is displayed in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. By resetting, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 can be continuously displayed even after the main control unit 41 is restored until the stop operation by the top switch is validated again. When the player can perform a stop operation with the stop switch, the navigation number is surely displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation information is displayed. It can be carried out.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started in a state where the specified number of bets is set. In a state before the game is finished by stopping the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed with a navigation number indicating an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player. When an error that causes an error code to be displayed is detected, when an error is detected during the game by starting the display of the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 when the game ends. Since the display of the error code as the predetermined content is restricted on the game auxiliary display 12 during the period until the game ends, the game auxiliary display 1 Or is displayed the display content is navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode in either an error code as a predetermined content, it can be prevented from being misidentified.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays an error code as a predetermined content other than the navigation number in a state in which a navigation number indicating an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. When the condition to be satisfied is satisfied, the predetermined content is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 until the game ends. However, in the state where the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, other than the navigation number In other words, the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is the navigation number or the predetermined content, even if the display content other than the error code is applied as the predetermined content. Can be prevented from being misidentified.

  Next, the control regarding the setting of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment sets the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the medal awarded as a first display content by winning the small role is displayed. The number of payouts can be displayed, and by setting navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display a navigation number that suggests a stop operation mode advantageous to the player as the second display content Furthermore, by setting error display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs as special display contents.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the main control unit 41 is in a period in which payout number display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout number is displayed as the first display content. If an error display condition is satisfied as a predetermined display switching condition for switching the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 to the special display content, the error state is controlled and the output buffer A evacuation process for evacuating data to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed, and the payout number display data set in the output buffer is evacuated to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, by initializing the output buffer and controlling the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 to non-display, by setting error display data as data for displaying the special display content in the output buffer, While controlling to display the error code as the special display content on the game auxiliary display 12, it is controlled to the error state and stands by.

  Then, when the reset switch 23 is operated according to a predetermined operation procedure, when the error condition is canceled and the return condition is satisfied, a return process is performed to return the data saved in the RAM 41c to the output buffer. The payout number display data for displaying the payout number as the first display content is returned from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer, so that the game auxiliary display 12 displays the payout number as the first display content. .

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment detects the error because the error display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the error display condition is satisfied after the error is detected. In the period from when the error display condition is satisfied, the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 are restricted from being changed, and an error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 when the period has elapsed. Be able to.

  In addition, when an error is detected when the game is started and at least one reel is controlled to rotate, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs a stop operation of all the reels, When the game is finished by stopping the reel, the error is notified. However, when the game is started and the reel is controlled to rotate, an error is detected when an error is detected. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may detect the error when displaying the navigation number as the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12. In some cases, an error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the total number of medals to be paid out as a payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary indicator 12 in accordance with the winning of a small role (eight in the present embodiment). If an error is detected during the period in which the total number of medals to be paid out is displayed as the first display content by setting the data to be displayed, then the error display condition is When established, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched to display an error code indicating the content of the error detected as the special display content (see FIG. 31). When displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting initial data of the payout number display data, the payout sensor 34c detects the medal payout. The payout number display data may be updated each time the control is performed so as to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12. In such a configuration, the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. While performing the control of paying out a predetermined number of medals with the winning of a small role while updating the payout number display data every time, for example, a payout error (E1) due to insufficient medals in the hopper unit 34 Is detected and the error display condition is satisfied, the payout number display data for displaying the number of medals last detected by the payout sensor 34c (for example, the fourth number, etc.) is stored in the save area. It will be evacuated. Thereafter, by temporarily initializing the output buffer, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be non-displayed, error display data indicating a payout error is set in the output buffer, and an error code is displayed. When the return condition is satisfied, the payout number display data for displaying the number of medals finally detected by the payout sensor 34c (for example, the fourth number, etc.) is used as the payout number display data. By returning to the output buffer 12, the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 can be returned to the display contents when an error is detected.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (b), the main control unit 41 is in a period in which navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation number is displayed as the second display content. If an error display condition is subsequently detected, the error state is controlled, and then the error state is controlled, and a common saving process is performed when the first display content is switched to the special display content. The navigation notification display data set in the output buffer can be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  Then, the error display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the error code is displayed as the special display content, while waiting in the error state, and when the return condition is satisfied, it is saved in the RAM 41c described above. When the data of the first display content is restored to the output buffer, the navigation notification display data of the RAM 41c is restored to the output buffer by performing a common restoration process, and the game auxiliary display 12 is set to the state before error detection. Similar navigation numbers can be displayed.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can be used when the payout number display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 or when the navigation notification display data is set. By performing a common saving process, the payout number display data and the navigation notification display data can be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 returns the payout number display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Even when returning to the output buffer, by performing a common return process, the payout number display data and the navigation notification display data saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c can be returned to the output buffer. ing.

  In the configuration in which both the number of medals paid out to the player on one display and the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player are displayed as in this embodiment, the display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out The processing and the display processing for displaying the advantageous operation mode may interfere with each other, and an unintended display may be performed on the game auxiliary display.

  On the other hand, the game auxiliary display 12 provided in the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display display contents based on the predetermined data by setting predetermined data in the output buffer. The main control unit 41 sets the payout number display data as the predetermined data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and pays out medals to be given as a first display content by winning a small role It is possible to display the number of images, and by setting navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display a navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode advantageous to the player as the second display content. In addition, by setting error display data in the output buffer, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs is displayed as special display contents. When the error display condition is satisfied as a condition for displaying the special display content in a state where the game auxiliary display device 12 displays the payout number of medals as the first display content. After executing the saving process and saving the payout number display data set in the output buffer to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the error display data for displaying the error code as the special display content is set in the output buffer. As a result, an error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and when the return condition is satisfied by canceling the error state, the return process is executed, and the payout number display data saved in the RAM 41c is output. By returning to the buffer, it is possible to display the payout number of medals as the first display content again on the game auxiliary display 12. When the error display condition is satisfied in a state where the game auxiliary display 12 displays a navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode advantageous to the player as the second display content, the above-described saving process is executed. Thus, after the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the error display data for displaying the error code as the special display content is set in the output buffer. An error code is displayed on the auxiliary display 12 and when the return condition is satisfied by canceling the error state, the above-described return processing is executed, whereby the navigation notification display data saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is displayed. By returning to the output buffer, it is possible to display the navigation number again as the second display content on the game auxiliary display 12. When the condition for switching to the display of the special display content is satisfied during the display of the first display content or the second display content, the data for causing the first display content set in the output buffer or the second Data for saving the table contents, displaying the special display contents by setting the special display contents in the output buffer, and displaying the first display contents saved when the return condition is satisfied Since the data for displaying the display content of 2 is returned to the output buffer and the first display content or the second display content is displayed again, different types of information can be displayed correctly.

  Further, by executing a common saving process, the payout number display data set in the output buffer is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since it is possible to save, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the save processing for saving these display contents.

  Further, the main control unit 41 executes a common evacuation process when a switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied even when the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed. The non-display data set in the output buffer may be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. With such a configuration, regardless of the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, Since the processing when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied can be made common, the capacity of the processing performed when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restores the payout number display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer by executing a common return process, and is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since the navigation notification display data can be returned to the output buffer, the capacity of the return process for returning these display contents can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 while displaying the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode advantageous for the player on the game auxiliary display 12. When the power interruption is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized so that the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed. Regardless of the displayed content, when the power interruption is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 may be initialized. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 during power interruption regardless of the display state on the game auxiliary display 12.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting predetermined data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. When switching the contents, the data set in the output buffer is saved in the RAM 41c and new data is set to switch the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 to the display contents based on the new data. However, when the first output buffer and the second output buffer are provided so as to be switchable, and the first output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the first output buffer is set. While the display content based on the data set in the output buffer of the game is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the second output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is used. When the output buffer is set, the display contents based on the data set in the second output buffer are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and the output buffer is configured as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. It is good also as a structure which can switch the display content of the game auxiliary | assistant display 12 by switching with a buffer.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, in the configuration in which the first output buffer and the second output buffer are provided as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the main control unit 41 displays the game auxiliary display. This occurs when an error is detected when the payout number display data is set in the first output buffer set as the output buffer of the game machine 12 to display the payout number on the game auxiliary display 12. While the error display data including the error code indicating the content of the error being set is set in the second output buffer, the payout number display data set in the first output buffer is held as it is. After that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the error assist condition is controlled, and the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched from the first output buffer to the second output buffer. Control is made to display an error code based on the error display data set in the output buffer No. 2, while controlling to an error state and waiting.

  Then, when the reset condition is satisfied by canceling the error state by operating the reset switch 23 according to a predetermined operation procedure, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is changed from the second output buffer to the first output buffer. By switching to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the payout number based on the payout number display data held in the first output buffer. Further, when the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched when the return condition is satisfied, the second output buffer is initialized based on the cancellation of the error state.

  Although not shown, the navigation assistance display data is set in the first output buffer by using the output buffer of the gaming assistance display 12 as the first output buffer, and the navigation number is displayed on the gaming assistance display 12. When an error is detected and an error code indicating the content of the error that has occurred is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the error display data is displayed in the second output buffer when the error is detected. After that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the error buffer can be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the second output buffer. When the return condition is satisfied, the display content of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is changed by switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary indicator 12 to the first output buffer. It is possible to return to a fine number.

  By adopting such a configuration, similarly to the configuration of the present embodiment, the number of medals to be awarded as a first display content by winning a small role, and a stop operation advantageous to the player as a second display content It is possible to display a navigation number suggesting an aspect and an error code indicating the content as a special display content when the error occurs on the common game auxiliary display 12.

  When the main control unit 41 detects an error, the main control unit 41 sets error display data including an error code indicating the content of the error that has occurred in the second output buffer, the error state is canceled, and the return condition is satisfied. Since the error display data is erased by initializing the second output buffer, the second output is output over the period from when the error is detected until the return condition is satisfied, that is, during the period in which the error occurs. Since the error display data is held in the buffer, it is possible to perform a predetermined determination process, for example, determination of an error occurrence state, using the data set in the second output buffer. Yes.

  Further, the main control unit 41 sets the error display data in the second output buffer when an error is detected, while holding the data set in the first output buffer as it is. By using data set in the output buffer, it is possible to perform predetermined determination processing, for example, determination of a control status such as whether navigation notification is in progress or payout.

  In addition, after setting the error display data in the second output buffer, the main control unit 41 switches the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the second output buffer when the error display condition is satisfied. After switching the buffer to the second output buffer, the display contents based on the data set in the second output buffer can be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 without delay.

  Also in such a configuration, when displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, every time a payout of the medal is detected by the payout sensor 34c. The payout number display data may be updated to control the display of the game auxiliary display 12 so that an error occurs while the payout number display data is being updated. When the error display condition is satisfied, during the period in which the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 based on the second output buffer, the payout number display data that is in the process of being updated is the first output. Since it is held in the buffer, when the return condition is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed on the basis of the first output buffer. The display of the payout number in aid display 12, can be returned to the display contents when an error is detected.

  In this way, the main control unit 41 sets the first output buffer and the second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for causing the game auxiliary display 12 to display predetermined display contents. In the configuration including the output buffer, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player as the normal display content and the error code indicating the content of the error occurring as the special display content. 12 is configured so that the first output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation notification display data is set in the first output buffer, so that the normal display contents The navigation number can be displayed as a switching condition for displaying the special display contents while the normal display contents are displayed. Based on the data set in the second output buffer, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched from the first output buffer to the second output buffer when the error display condition is satisfied. When the special display content is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the return condition is satisfied by canceling the error state, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is changed from the second output buffer to the first output buffer. In the same way as the configuration of the present embodiment, different types of information can be displayed on the game assisting display 12 by switching to the display so that the navigation number is displayed again as the first display content on the game assisting display 12. Each can be displayed correctly.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 has a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for causing the game auxiliary display 12 to display predetermined display contents. In the configuration including the error control condition, the main control unit 41 is the content of the error that has occurred before the error display condition is established as the switching condition for displaying the error code as the special display content and after the error is detected. By setting the error display data including the error code indicating the error display data to display the error code as the special display content without being aware of the timing when the error display condition is satisfied, the second output The timing set in the buffer can be designed relatively freely.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 has a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for causing the game auxiliary display 12 to display predetermined display contents. In the configuration including the first data buffer, it is possible to refer to data set in the first output buffer or the second output buffer in a predetermined determination process (for example, error determination). Since a predetermined determination process can be performed using data set in the output buffer or the second output buffer (for example, in the case of error determination, data set in the second output buffer), a predetermined determination can be made. It is not necessary to have data used for processing separately from display content data.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 has a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for causing the game auxiliary display 12 to display predetermined display contents. In the configuration comprising the above, as the normal display content, the medal payout number (first display content) to be paid out to the player upon winning, and the advantageous operation advantageous to the player, in which the display period does not overlap with the first display content The main control unit 41 includes the navigation number (second display content) indicating the mode, and the main control unit 41 sets the first display content and the second display content in the first output buffer, thereby allowing the game auxiliary display 12 to By displaying the number of medals to be paid out and the navigation number, it is possible to display the game auxiliary display by setting the first output buffer for both different display contents that do not overlap the display period. Can be displayed in 12, it is not necessary to provide an extra output buffer.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 has a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for causing the game auxiliary display 12 to display predetermined display contents. In the configuration comprising: when the power interruption is detected regardless of which display is being performed on the game auxiliary indicator 12, the first output buffer and the second output buffer are set. It is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of a power interruption.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the game control board 40 can be connected to the test apparatus 1300 via the first interface board (IF1) 1100 and the second interface board (IF2) 1200, and the slot A test signal generated in relation to a game result in the machine 1 is output from the game control board 40 to the test apparatus 1300, and a test signal is input from the test apparatus 1300 to the game control board 40. The simulation test can be automatically performed by connecting the game control board 40 and the test apparatus 1300.

  The game control board 40 is connected to the IF1 board 1105, connected to the first information output circuit 40a for outputting the first test signal, the input circuit 40d for inputting the test signal, and the IF2 board 1205 for the second test. A second information output circuit 40b for outputting a signal is mounted.

  The first test signal indicates the control state and the result of the game. The insertion request lamp signal, the start possible lamp signal, the BB signal, the game signal, the replay game signal, and the first to third reel stop possible lamps Signal, first to third reel index signal, payout request signal, payout count signal, stop signal, set value display 7 segment display ag signal, internal winning flag 1-8 signal, signal delay signal, first reel A motor excitation signal, a second reel motor excitation signal, and a third reel motor excitation signal are included. These first test signals are output under the control of the main control unit 41.

  The insertion request lamp signal is a drive signal of the insertion request LED 17, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the insertion request LED 17 is lit, and can specify whether or not a medal insertion is requested.

  The start enable lamp signal is a drive signal of the start valid LED 18, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the start valid LED 18 is lit, and can specify whether or not a game start operation is requested. .

  The BB signal, the game signal, and the replay game signal are signals indicating that the game state is BB, medium, and replay game, respectively, and the game state at that time can be specified.

  The first to third reel stop enable lamp signals are signals indicating whether the left, middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R are driven, that is, whether the left, middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R are lit. It is possible to specify whether or not the left reel, middle reel, and right reel can be stopped.

  The first to third reel index signals are detection signals of the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R, and can specify the passage of the reference positions of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

  The payout request signal is a drive signal for the hopper motor 34b, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the hopper motor 34b is being driven, and it is possible to specify that a medal payout operation is being performed.

  The payout count signal is a signal that is output every time a medal payout associated with winning is detected, and is a signal that causes the test apparatus 1300 to count the payout of medals.

  The stop signal is a signal indicating that the stop state is controlled. The 7-segment display a to g signals for setting value display are drive signals for the LEDs constituting each segment of the setting value display 24, and the setting values displayed on the setting value display 24 can be specified. .

  The internal winning flags 1 to 8 are signals indicating the winning status of the combination. Further, the signal delaying signal is a signal indicating that the signal is in a delayed state with the execution of an effect during the game.

  The first to third reel motor excitation signals are drive signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, that is, the reel motors that drive the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and the drive status of each reel can be specified. .

  The test signals include an input switch signal, a reel start switch signal, first to third reel stop switch signals, a payout switch signal, a stop release switch signal, a setting key switch signal, and a setting switch signal. Input to the substrate 40. These test signals are signals that function in the same manner as the detection signals of the various switches and sensors provided in the slot machine 1, detected by the switch detection circuit 44 provided in the game control board 40, and each test signal by the main control unit 41. The detection of a switch or sensor corresponding to is determined.

  The insertion switch signal is a signal corresponding to the insertion medal sensor 31, and the reel start switch signal is a signal corresponding to the start switch 7. The first to third reel stop switch signals are signals corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively. The payout switch signal is a signal corresponding to the payout sensor 34c. The stop release switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset switch 23. The setting key switch signal is a signal corresponding to the setting key switch 37. The setting switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset / setting switch 38.

  The first information output circuit 40a is a circuit for outputting a first test signal to the IF1 substrate 1105, and the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a passes through the IF1 substrate 1105. Output to the test apparatus 1300.

  The input circuit 40d is a circuit for inputting a test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 substrate 1105. The test signal input to the input circuit 40d is detected by the switch detection circuit 44. .

  The IF1 substrate 1105 includes an input terminal to which the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is input, and an output terminal to output the input first test signal to the test apparatus 1300. ing. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler, and the information included in the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is electrically insulated from the test apparatus 1300. Is transmitted to the side. The IF1 board 1105 includes an input terminal to which a test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 is input, and an output terminal to output the input test signal to the input circuit 40d. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler, and information included in the test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 is transmitted to the input circuit 40d in an electrically insulated state. It has become. Note that the first test signal and the test signal may be transmitted in a state where the input terminal and the output terminal are electrically insulated. For example, the input terminal and the output are output via a photo interrupter or an isolator. The structure which connects with a terminal may be sufficient.

  The second test signal indicates an operation mode notified by navigation notification, and includes a game start signal and a navigation notification signal. The second test signal is output under the control of the main control unit 41.

  The game start signal is a signal indicating the start of the game. The navigation in-progress signal is output from the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification display data for displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 in the control related to the navigation notification using the game auxiliary display 12 described above. This is a drive signal for lighting the eighth segment of the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12, based on the fact that the navigation notification is executed, and the type of push order winning and the game selected Is turned on when a navigation number indicating a stop operation mode advantageous to the user is displayed on the display devices 12L and 12R, no navigation notification is executed, and no navigation number is displayed on the display devices 12L and 12R. It is a signal indicating whether or not the navigation notification is being executed due to the off state sometimes.

  The display signal is based on the fact that the navigation notification display data, the payout number display data, and the error display data are set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 in the control related to the navigation notification performed using the game auxiliary display 12 described above. This is a drive signal for turning on the first to seventh segments of the display devices 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display device 12 in a lighting mode for displaying any one of the navigation number, the number of payouts, and the error code. It includes a plurality of information such as information, information relating to the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and information relating to an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs.

  The navigation notification signal is a signal generated by extracting only the information related to the navigation notification from the display signal by the conversion circuit 40c mounted on the second information output circuit, and the navigation number is displayed during the navigation notification. It is a drive signal for lighting the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R in the lighting mode to be displayed, and is a signal that can specify the navigation number indicating the stop operation mode notified by the navigation notification.

  The second information output circuit 40b is a circuit for outputting a second test signal to the IF2 substrate 1205, and the second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b passes through the IF2 substrate 1205. Output to the test apparatus 1300.

  In addition, a navigation in-progress signal and a display signal input to the game auxiliary display 12 provided on the game control board 40 are branched and input to the second information output circuit 40b on the game control board 40. And a conversion circuit 40c that converts the display signal into a navigation notification signal by enabling or disabling the display signal based on the in-navigation signal, and outputs the navigation signal. The display signal of the display 12 can be output to the IF2 substrate 1205 as a navigation notification signal.

  The IF2 substrate 1205 is a test apparatus based on the input terminal to which the second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is input and the input second test signal (game start signal, navigation notification signal). An IF2 control unit 1203 that converts the second test signal to be recognizable on the 1300 side, and an output terminal that outputs the second test signal generated by the IF2 control unit 1203 to the test apparatus 1300. .

  The IF2 control unit 1203 includes a CPU, RAM, ROM, a reset circuit for resetting the CPU, and the like. The navigation notification signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is used as a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation. Signal and stop strobe signal are converted and output. The stop execution position signal, stop reel designation signal, and stop strobe signal output from the IF2 control unit 1203 are output from the output terminal via the photocoupler. The IF2 control unit 1203 side and the test apparatus 1300 side The signal is transmitted in a state where and are electrically insulated. The IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal are electrically insulated from each other as long as the stop execution position signal, the stop reel designation signal, and the stop strobe signal are transmitted. For example, a photo interrupter or an isolator is connected. Alternatively, the IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal may be connected via each other.

  The stop execution position signal is a signal indicating the most recommended stop operation position for the reel indicated by the stop reel designation signal described later according to the current gaming state and effect mode, and the corresponding reel included in the most recommended stop operation position. The number of steps (0 to 336) of the reel motor can be specified.

  The stop reel designation signal is a signal that designates whether the reel that recommends the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the stop execution position signal is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel. The reel to which the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the execution position signal is applied can be specified.

  The stop strobe signal is a signal for requesting acquisition of a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal.

  Further, the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1105 are connected via a power line, and power used by a device such as a photocoupler mounted on the IF1 board 1105 is supplied from the game control board 40 via the power line. On the other hand, the game control board 40 and the IF2 board 1205 are not connected by the power supply line, and the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205 are connected via the power supply line, and are supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1105. Part of the generated power is supplied via the IF1 substrate 1105 as power used by devices such as the IF2 control unit 1203 and the photocoupler mounted on the IF2 substrate 1205. Therefore, as the power supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1105 via the power line, the power used by the device mounted on the IF1 board 1105 and the power used by the device mounted on the IF2 board 1205 , Both of which are ensured.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 includes a connection terminal to which wiring from the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205 can be connected, and a first information output circuit 40a, a second information output circuit 40b, and an input circuit 40d. A possible socket is provided, and a wiring pattern for transmitting a first test signal output from the main control unit 41 and various drive circuits to the socket of the first information output circuit 40a, and a second test signal are provided. A wiring pattern for transmitting to the socket of the second information output circuit 40b and a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal from the connection terminal to the switch detection circuit 44 via the input circuit 40d are formed. The first test signal and the second test signal output from the various driving circuits are the wiring pattern, the first information output circuit 40a. Is outputted through the second information output circuit 40b and the connecting terminal, the connecting terminal, an input circuit 40d and the test signal inputted via the wiring pattern are inputted to the switch detection circuit 44.

  In addition, since the connection terminal includes, for example, a signal pin that can connect a probe from the IF1 board 1105 and a connector that can connect a cable from the IF1 board 1105, the connection terminal can be connected to the IF1 board 1105 via these connection terminals. It is possible to easily connect the wires.

  The connection terminals are provided for the purpose of connecting the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205, and the connection terminals for inputting and outputting these test signals and test signals are shipped to the amusement store. This is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine. For this reason, the gaming control board 40 of the present embodiment has a plurality of cutting holes for cutting the portion provided with the connection terminals, and can be cut along these cutting holes. At the time of shipment, the portion where the connection terminal is provided can be cut off so that unnecessary signals cannot be input and output. Thereby, for example, the internal winning flag 1-8 signal is detected in the hall device, the winning status of the internal winning flag is identified from the internal winning flag 1-8 signal, and the fact is notified, etc. It can be prevented from being easily used for the purpose. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

  The first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b are provided for the purpose of outputting the first test signal and the second test signal to the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205, respectively. The input circuit 40d is provided for the purpose of inputting a test signal from the IF1 board 1105, and is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine shipped to the game store. is there. For this reason, the game control board 40 of this embodiment is provided with sockets in which the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d can be mounted. (2) The information output circuit 40b and the input circuit 40d can be easily removed, and the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d are not required when shipped to the game store. It is possible to make it impossible to input / output a simple signal. Thereby, for example, the internal winning flag 1-8 signal is detected in the hall device, the winning status of the internal winning flag is identified from the internal winning flag 1-8 signal, and the fact is notified, etc. It can be prevented from being easily used for the purpose. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

  The number of slot machines provided for testing by a third-party organization is usually only a few. In addition, slot machines for mass production shipped to amusement stores receive these test signals and test signals. Since there is a low need for output, these slot machines for mass production may be equipped with a game control board 40 that has a wiring pattern but is not provided with the connection terminals described above. The manufacturing cost of the slot machine can be reduced. Furthermore, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, the IF1 board 1105, the IF2 board 1205, and the test apparatus 1300 can be installed only by mounting the connection terminals. It becomes possible to connect easily. Also, only the test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting test signals and test signals, and connection terminals for connection with the IF1 substrate 1105, IF2 substrate 1205 and the test apparatus 1300. These wiring patterns and connection terminals may not be provided. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not be actually output. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

  Further, the slot machine for mass production is mounted with the game control board 40 which is provided with a wiring pattern but does not have the sockets for the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b and the input circuit 40d described above. In this case, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be reduced. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, the socket is mounted, and the first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b are mounted. By simply attaching the input circuit 40d, it is possible to easily connect the IF1 board, the IF2 board, and the test apparatus 1300. In addition, a wiring pattern for transmitting test signals and test signals only to the test slot machine, and a socket for mounting the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d are provided for mass production. The slot machine may be configured without these wiring patterns and sockets. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not be actually output. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

  In the present embodiment, a simulation test is automatically performed by performing such a test signal and test signal exchange between the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1300. In the test apparatus 1300, As a result of these tests, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be output. Specifically, the ratio of the number of times when the payout count signal is detected during the period to be tested (the number of medals to be paid out) to the number of times the insertion switch signal is output during the period to be tested (the number of medals consumed) is calculated. The result (consumption number / payout number) is output as the payout rate.

  The IF2 control unit 1203 first shows a reel that recommends a stop reel designation signal as the first stop reel in accordance with the presence / absence of navigation notification within a maximum of 2 seconds from the time when the main control unit 41 outputs the game start signal. In addition to updating to the output state, the stop execution position signal is updated to an output state indicating a recommended stop operation position for the reel, and after completion of the update of the stop reel designation signal and the stop execution position signal, a fixed time (50 ms) A stop strobe signal is output over a period of time, the recommended first stop reel and its stop operation position are notified to the test apparatus 1300, and after the stop strobe signal is stopped, a predetermined time (50 ms) is waited. Next, in a similar procedure, the test apparatus 1300 is notified of the second stop reel and its stop operation position that are sequentially recommended, and the test apparatus 1300 is notified of the third stop reel and its stop operation position. After the notification of the third stop reel and its stop operation position, the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are cleared when a certain time (50 ms) has passed.

  As described above, the IF2 control unit 1203 sequentially sets the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, the third stop reel and its stop operation position to the test apparatus 1300 in accordance with the recommended operation mode. In response to the notification, the operation procedure recommended by the test apparatus 1300 can be specified.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, the third stop reel and its stop operation position are continuously provided to the test apparatus 1300 for a maximum of 2 seconds. However, instead of transmitting these continuously, it is also possible to transmit them sequentially when the game starts and when the reels stop.

  The ROM of the IF2 control unit 1203 stores a recommended operation mode table in which recommended operation modes are registered in advance according to the presence / absence of navigation notification. The IF2 control unit 1203 recommends according to the presence / absence of navigation notification. An operation mode is acquired from the recommended operation procedure table, and a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal are output based on the acquired operation mode. Note that the recommended operation mode table registered in advance may not be provided, and the recommended operation mode may be acquired using a program in which the IF2 control unit 1203 determines the recommended operation mode according to the presence / absence of navigation notification.

  In the present embodiment, the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is not performed, and when the navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting winning of the BB is not output, A stop reel designation signal is output in this order, and for the corresponding stop reel, a stop operation position at which the configuration symbols of the corner cherries 1 and 2, the middle watermelon, and the right-down watermelon can be pulled out can be drawn. The execution position signal is output. Note that such an operation mode corresponds to an operation mode in which the medal payout rate is highest in a situation where navigation notification is not performed.

  Further, when the navigation notification signal indicates that navigation notification is being performed and the navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting winning of the BB is output, the navigation order is in the order of the left middle right stop order. A stop reel designation signal is output, and a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which a symbol constituting a special combination corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn is output for the corresponding stop reel. For example, when BB1 is won as a special role and 11 is output as the navigation number, stop execution indicating the stop operation position at which the symbol of “blue 7” can be drawn for each rotating reel When a position signal is output, and other BBs 2 and 3 are selected as special roles and 10, 12, and 13 are output as navigation numbers, “red 7” is output according to the output navigation number. A stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which the symbols “White 7” and “BAR” can be drawn is output.

  When the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is being performed, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order of the stop order specified from the navigation notification signal, and any corresponding stop reel is output. A stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position is output.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the recommended operation mode is acquired according to the presence or absence of the navigation notification, and the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal indicating the acquired operation mode are output to the test apparatus 1300. It is possible to output a reel stop switch signal in an operation mode recommended according to the presence or absence of navigation notification on the device 1300 side, and a payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained by a test by the test device 1300.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the special combination (BB) is won as a result of the internal lottery, the winning combination is established after the execution conditions for the special combination navigation notification determined on the main control unit 41 side are established. A navigation execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating an operation mode for stopping a symbol corresponding to the navigation number are set to the test apparatus 1300 by setting a navigation number (10 to 13) indicating a symbol constituting the special role. Therefore, after winning the special role in the internal lottery in the slot machine on the market, the sub-control unit 91 notifies the winning of the special role by the confirmation notification, and then the operation is performed in a stop operation mode in which the special role is won. As in the case where the special role is won, the navigation number is output and the special role is won in the game after the conditions for conducting the special feature navigation notification are established and the final notification is made. That in the operating mode it is possible to output a reel stop switch signal, it is possible to obtain a payout rate close to the payout rate of the market by the test by the test device 1300.

  In the present embodiment, a signal that can specify the number of steps of the reel motor corresponding to the output timing of the stop switch signal recommended as the stop execution position signal is output to the test apparatus 1300. Even when the number of symbols and the number of steps assigned to one symbol differ depending on the type of slot machine, the test apparatus 1300 can share the output control of the stop switch signal with respect to the stop execution position signal.

  The test system including the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment and a test apparatus 1300 capable of performing a game test using the slot machine has a first test signal out of the test signals output from the game control board 40. The second test signal is output to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1205. The second test signal is output to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1205.

  In such a configuration, when power lines are connected from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205 to supply power to the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205, respectively, the game control boards 40 and 1 Wiring between the interface board (IF1) and the IF2 board 1205 increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1105 can be connected via a power line, and power is directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1105. Thus, power is not directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1205, but power supplied to the IF1 board 1105 is supplied from the IF1 board 1105 to the IF2 board 1205. The wiring between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1105 and IF2 board 1205 can be reduced.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output a first test signal to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 board 1105, and to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1205. The game control board 40 can be connected to the IF1 board 1105 via a power supply line, and the game control board 40 can directly supply power to the IF1 board 1105. On the other hand, the IF2 board 1205 is not connected to the IF2 board 1205 through the IF1 board 1105 without being directly connected to the IF2 board 1205 via the IF1 board 1105. Since power can be supplied to the game control board 40, the wiring between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1105 and IF2 board 1205 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output a navigation notification signal including information related to navigation notification to the IF2 substrate 1205 as the second test signal. The IF2 substrate 1205 receives the navigation notification signal. Is provided with an IF2 control unit 1203 that generates signals (stop execution position signal, stop reel designation signal, stop strobe signal) in a mode that can be input by the test apparatus 1300, and the IF2 control unit 1203 is a game control board 40 is operated by the power supplied from the game control board 40 via the IF1 board 1105, so that it is not necessary to output power from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1205, and only the second test signal is outputted. The IF2 control unit 1203 generates a signal that can be input by the test apparatus 1300 and outputs the signal to the test apparatus 1300. It and it is possible to simplify the test signal output from the gaming control board 40.

  The game control board 40 may generate a second test signal that can be input by the test apparatus 1300, and output the second test signal to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1205. good.

  The IF1 board 1105 only relays the first test signal output from the game control board 40, but the IF1 board 1105 also has a control unit on which a CPU or the like is mounted, It is good also as a structure which changes into the aspect which can input the output 1st test signal in the testing apparatus 1300, and simplifies the test signal output from the game control board 40 by setting it as such a structure. Can do.

  In this embodiment, the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205 are equipped with photocouplers, and the input terminals and output terminals of each board are connected via the photocouplers, and output from the game control board 40. The first test signal and the second test signal are output to the test apparatus via the photocouplers mounted on the IF1 board 1105 and the IF2 board 1205, whereby the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1300 are electrically connected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the other device from being damaged due to an abnormality in one device.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is equipped with the indicators 12L and 12R that display the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R notified by the navigation notification, and the indicators 12L and 12R are displayed by the navigation notification. A display signal that is a drive signal for turning on the LED is branched and output to the IF2 substrate as a navigation notification signal via the second information output circuit 40b, whereby the indicators 12L and 12R. The driving signal can be used as a navigation notification signal.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute navigation notification when controlling to the AT, and the game control board 40 sends a first test signal indicating the game result to the IF1 board 1105. The configuration includes a first information output circuit 40a for outputting and a second information output circuit 40b for outputting a second test signal to the IF2 substrate 1205 as a navigation notification signal including information related to navigation notification. The control unit 41 may not perform navigation notification, and the game control board 40 may not output a navigation notification signal to the IF2 board 1205. In such a configuration, the first information output circuit 40a of the present embodiment is not used. And outputting a test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1105 by using a common circuit and a means for executing navigation notification and a navigation notification signal Regardless of whether provided with a stage, it is possible to share the circuit for outputting a test signal indicating the result of the game against IF1 substrate 1105 in the gaming control board 40.

  In the present embodiment, the display signal and the in-navigation signal are input to the second information output circuit 40b, and only the information related to the navigation notification is extracted from the display signal by the conversion circuit in the second information output circuit 40b, and the navigation notification is performed. A signal is generated and a navigation notification signal is transmitted from the second information output circuit 40b to the IF2 substrate 1205. The main control unit 41 directly generates a signal including only information related to the navigation notification. The signal may be transmitted to the IF2 substrate 1205 from the second information output circuit 40b by inputting the signal to the second information output circuit 40b.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs as a navigation alerting | reporting signal using all the one part data of the 1st internal winning command, 2nd internal winning command, and pushing order command which are transmitted with respect to the sub-control part 91. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to generate a signal only for outputting a navigation notification signal. As such a configuration, for example, the main control unit 41 can transmit a push order command to the IF2 control unit 1203, and the IF2 control unit 1203 identifies a navigation number based on the push order command, and A stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels stop in accordance with the navigation number, and a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which the configuration symbol corresponding to the navigation number can be pulled in for the corresponding stop reel is output. It is good also as composition to do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode for lighting the indicators 12L and 12R by navigation notification is that the indicators 12L and 12R are lit in one lighting mode at the time of winning the push order, so that from the first stop. Although all stop orders up to the third stop can be specified, the drive signal for turning on the indicators 12L and 12R in the lighting mode is branched and transmitted to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1205. The lighting mode for turning on the indicators 12L and 12R by navigation notification shows the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to be stopped next, and then switches the lighting mode every time the stop operation is performed, thereby sequentially changing the stop order. It may be configured to notify so that it can be specified. In such a configuration, a signal that can specify all stop orders from the first stop to the third stop when the pushing order is won. Is preferably generated by the main control unit 41 and transmitted to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1205, so that the test apparatus 1300 is notified by the navigation notification at an earlier stage. It becomes possible to specify the stop order.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is the structure which alert | reports the stop operation aspect (stop order or stop operation timing) advantageous to a player as navigation alerting | reporting, but the advantage for a player does not change as production. However, a configuration may be adopted in which navigation notification for performing a reel stop operation in a predetermined stop operation mode is performed. As such a configuration, for example, as one replaying player who wins a replay regardless of the stop order and is given a replay, the operation is performed in one stop order (for example, right middle left stop order). When the combination of symbols 1 (for example, “red 7-red 7-red 7”) is stopped and the stop operation is performed in the other stop order (for example, stop order of left middle right), the first symbol In a configuration in which a combination of symbols different from the combination (for example, “Replay-Replay-Replay”) is stopped, when the main control unit 41 decides to stop the first symbol combination as an effect. When the navigation number indicating one stop order is output and it is determined not to stop the combination of the first symbols, the navigation number indicating the other stop order is output. IF2 control to stop the combination of 1 symbol 1203 identifies a navigation number based on the push order command, outputs a stop reel designation signal in the order of the stop order of the reels according to the navigation number, and a configuration pattern corresponding to the navigation number for the corresponding stop reel By outputting a stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which it can be pulled in, a stop operation close to a slot machine on the market can be performed even by a test by the test apparatus 1300.

  Further, with such a configuration, for example, a configuration in which the advantage after the next game is changed on condition that the combination of the first symbols is stopped (the combination of the first symbols is stopped). A configuration for shifting to a predetermined gaming state, a configuration in which the number of games controlled by the AT is increased by stopping the combination of the first symbols, etc.), and the first symbol combination by the navigation number Even in the configuration in which the stop operation mode for stopping the player is suggested to the player, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order of the reel stop sequence corresponding to the navigation number, and the corresponding stop reel is configured according to the navigation number By outputting a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which a symbol can be drawn, a payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained by a test by the test apparatus 1300.

  Further, by adopting such a configuration, for example, a combination having the same degree of advantage (for example, replay), a combination constituted by a combination of the first symbols and a combination constituted by the combination of the second symbols. In the case of winning in the internal lottery, a stop operation mode capable of winning the combination of the first symbol combination in order to stop the reel of the first symbol combination as an effect is shown. When the navigation number is output, the stop operation position at which the stop reel designation signal is output in the order of the stop of the reel according to the navigation number, and the configuration symbols corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn in for the corresponding stop reel By outputting a stop execution position signal indicating, the reel is stopped at a content close to the content of the reel stop mode stopped in the slot machine on the market by the test by the test apparatus 1300. It is possible.

[About database in RAM 91c]
Next, the game history database in the RAM 91c of the slot machine 1 will be described. Hereinafter, the database may be referred to as “DB”. A game history database in the RAM 91c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A shows an example of a game history database. The game history database includes the number of digested games, the number of winnings of a predetermined role (such as at least one of a bonus, a small role, and a re-gamer), and the number of ATs (the number of times controlled by AT), experience, during the game history update period. Consists of value, character level, etc. The game history update period is a period from when a password is input to when a two-dimensional code is output. The password is issued by the management server 1200, and can be acquired (displayed on the display unit of the mobile terminal 1100) when the player accesses the management server 1200 by the mobile terminal 1100. Note that the player can also play a game without entering a password.

  Within each game history update period, the number of games in the game history database is updated by one each time one game is consumed. Within the game history update period, the number of ATs in the game history database is updated every time it is controlled by the AT.

  Next, experience values will be described. When the predetermined mission shown in FIG. 48 is achieved, the sub-control unit 91 performs mission completion notification and gives an experience value associated with the mission. Every time an experience value is assigned, the added experience value is added and updated. Each time the added and updated experience value reaches a predetermined number (30 in this embodiment), the character level is updated by one. The sub-control unit 91 of the slot machine 1 can execute an effect according to the level of the character. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The two-dimensional code is displayed when the player performs a two-dimensional code output operation in the password mode. When the two-dimensional code is imaged by the player's portable terminal 1100, the number of games accumulated in the game history update period, the number of winnings, the number of ATs, the character level, the experience value, and the like (that is, various types stored in the RAM 91c) (Hereinafter referred to as “accumulated information”) is transmitted to the management server 1200 via the portable terminal 1100. In the RAM 91c of this embodiment, game history information is not stored for each terminal identification information. Therefore, the storage capacity of the RAM 91c can be reduced.

[About the game history database]
Next, the game history database stored in the storage unit 220 of the management server 1200 will be described. FIG. 39 shows an example of the game history database. As shown in FIG. 39, the game history database includes terminal identification information (SIM data) that can identify the portable terminal 1100 owned by the player, game date and time, password (last issued), number of digested games, The number of winnings, the number of ATs, the current level of the character, the experience earned by the player, etc. for each predetermined player (at least one of bonus, small role, re-gamer, etc.) for each player (for each terminal identification information) It is registered. The stored information transmitted via the player's portable terminal 1100 is stored in the game history database of the storage unit 220.

[About the startup process executed by the main control unit 41]
The main control unit 41 executes the startup process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped (powered off). Here, as a factor for stopping the power supply to the slot machine 1, a store clerk or the like turns off the power switch 39 of the slot machine 1 and a sudden power interruption such as a power failure, for example. Including things.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the startup process by the main control unit 41. FIG. 40 shows the main processing. The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (S22). When the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state (Y in S22), the main control unit 41 shifts to the setting change state (S24). The setting change state is a state in which the setting value can be changed by operating a reset / setting switch 38 (see FIG. 6) provided in the slot machine 1 after the front door 1b is opened. The set value is a value that specifies the winning probability in the internal lottery and is a value stored in the set value work. The set value consists of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the most advantageous for the player (highest medal payout rate), and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the degree of advantage. (The medal payout rate is low). That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In S24, the main control unit 41 transmits a setting start command to the sub-control unit 91 (S24), and the process proceeds to S26. The setting start command is a command that can specify that the setting change state has started. The sub-control unit 91 recognizes that the transition to the setting change state is started by receiving the setting start command.

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state (N in S22), the main control unit 41 proceeds to the process of S26 without performing the process of S24. In S26, the notification state of the predetermined notification unit is controlled to the state before power interruption. Here, the slot machine 1 has a backup power source. Therefore, even when a sudden power interruption (for example, a power failure) occurs, information stored in the backup area for a predetermined period by supplying backup power to the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91. (Hereinafter also referred to as pre-interruption information). When the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 return from the power interruption, the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 can return the display state of various notification units to the display state before the power interruption based on the information and the flag saved in the backup area. . Here, as shown in FIG. 54, the predetermined notification unit includes “1BETLED14, 2BETLED15, 3BETLED16 (hereinafter also referred to as BET display unit)” and “payout number display unit (game assist display) 12”. And “a transparent area 51b (hereinafter also referred to as a winning display portion) corresponding to the see-through window 3 that lights the reel LED 55 when the small winning combination wins and notifies that the small winning combination has been won”. After the process of S26, the process proceeds to S32.

  In S32, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a setting start command has been transmitted (that is, whether or not the processing in S24 has been executed). This determination method will be described. For example, when the process of S24 is executed, a setting start command transmission completion flag is stored in the RAM of the main control unit 41. In S32, it is determined whether a setting start command transmitted flag is stored. If it is determined that the setting start command transmitted flag is stored, YES is determined in S32. On the other hand, if it is determined in S32 that the setting start command transmission completed flag is not stored, NO is determined in S32. If YES is determined in S32, the setting start command transmitted flag is deleted.

  In S34, it is determined whether or not a set value confirmation operation has been executed. Here, the set value confirming operation is an operation for confirming the set value changed in the setting change state. The set value confirmation operation of the present embodiment is “after the operation to the start switch 7, the operation to turn off the setting key switch 37 after the operation to the start switch 7, and the operation to turn off the setting key switch 37. “Operation for closing front door 1b”. In S34, the process waits until the set value confirmation operation is executed (NO in S34). If it is determined in S34 that the set value confirmation operation has been executed, the process proceeds to S36.

  In S 36, the setting change state is ended and a setting end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The setting end command is a command that can specify that the setting change state has ended. The sub-control unit 91 recognizes that the setting change state has been ended by receiving the setting end command.

  On the other hand, when the setting command (start command) is not transmitted (N in S32), the main control unit 41 ends the process without performing the process of S34.

  Further, in the activation process, in addition to the process of FIG. 40, an error detection process for detecting the presence or absence of an error in each part of the main control unit 41 is executed.

[About the startup process executed by the sub-control unit 91]
After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped (powered off), the sub-control unit 91 executes a startup process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the activation process in the sub-control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 executes an accessory initialization process for initial operation of the character accessory 200 and the rotating accessory 201 (S52). Here, the initial action of the character actor 200 is to place the character actor 200 at the initial position (origin position) and to drive the character actor 200 existing at the initial position (position shown in FIG. 4) (see FIG. 4). To confirm the operation by moving the arm member 300 and the finger member 311 to the origin position and performing the same operation as the actual effect, The operation is confirmed by rotating the rotating body 201 ′. In this way, by performing the initial operation, the store clerk or the like can confirm whether or not each accessory operates normally when power is restored.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the accessory initialization process (S52) of this embodiment. In the accessory initialization process, the sub CPU 91a first specifies the movable body to be operated first based on the setting data (S101). The setting data includes the order data of the movable body. In this embodiment, the order of the character combination 200 (main body) → the arm member 300 → the finger member 311 → the rotation combination 201 is preset as the order. ing. Therefore, when S101 is first executed, the character combination 200 is specified as the target movable body. In addition, as an order in the actual action checking action, the order of the character combination 200 (including the arm member 300 and the finger member 311) → the rotation combination 201 is set in advance.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the movable body specified in S101 is an origin detection target movable body that requires origin detection (S102).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a movable body other than the rotating accessory 201 is set as the origin detection target movable body that needs to perform the origin detection. Therefore, when the movable object specified in S101 is the character accessory 200, the arm member 300, or the finger member 311, it is determined as “Y” in the determination, while the movable object specified in S101 is the rotating accessory 201. In this case, it is determined as “N”.

  When it is determined “N” in S102, the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, if “Y” is determined in S102, the process proceeds to S103, the detection state of the origin detection sensor corresponding to the movable body to be operated is specified (S103), and whether the origin detection sensor is in the detection state or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S104).

  When it is not located at the origin position (initial position) (S104; N), the process proceeds to S105, and after setting the non-detection operation number counter for counting the number of non-detection operation executions to 0 ( S105), as the control speed for operating the operation target object, the operation target combination at the same operation speed as the minimum speed (see FIGS. 44 and 45) in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later. The minimum control speed for moving the object is set (S106), and the drive device for the movable object to be moved (if the movable object to be moved is the character combination 200, the first drive device 99a, and the movable object to be moved is the arm member 300). In the case of the second driving device 99b, the third driving device 99c in the case where the operation target movable body is the arm member 300, the third driving device 99c in the case where the operation target movable body is the arm member 300, Along with starts driving the fourth drive unit 99d) in the home position direction (S107), it starts the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer (S108). Note that the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is performed, for example, by counting the number of signals output every predetermined period from the CTC (counter / timer circuit) already initialized in the activation process. You can do it.

  Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state in which the origin detection sensor enters a detection state and monitors whether or not the non-detection operation period timer has reached a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S109, S110).

  When the operation target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position) by driving the operation target movable body drive device (for example, the first drive device 99a) in the origin position direction, and the origin detection sensor enters the detection state. In step S130, the driving of the movable accessory driving motor is stopped. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer becomes a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the operation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S112 is performed. The process returns to step S1 to store the return-to-origin error of the movable object to be operated and add 1 to the non-detection operation frequency counter (S112). It is determined whether or not the number of determinations (for example, 3) has been reached (S113).

  When the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the driving of the movable accessory driving motor is stopped, and the origin return error of the operation subject accessory is stored (S114). Proceed to S130. That is, in the non-detection operation control, when the operation target combination is not located at the origin position (initial position), the operation control for actual operation confirmation to be described later is not executed for the operation target combination ( The return to origin error is stored in order to set the action subject to a dead end state, and the process proceeds to S130.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the non-detection operation frequency counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the operation target accessory is illustrated as being in a dead end state. However, when the value of the non-detection operation count counter reaches the operation error determination count in S113, the error processing is started and the error processing is executed, whereby the accessory initialization process is performed. May be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120, etc.) may not be activated (dead end state).

  In addition, when the action target object is set to the dead end state, the effect control board 90 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the sub CPU 91a has an input signal (for example, an operation signal indicating that the moveable object is operated) It is preferable to execute a process of invalidating the reception of the detection signal of the effect switch 56 or the like, or preventing the movable accessory from operating even when the input signal is input.

  On the other hand, if the value of the non-detection operation number counter has not reached the operation error determination number, the process returns to S106, and the processing of S106 to S108 is performed again, so that the operation target movable body is moved to the actual operation confirmation operation. Operation control (non-detection operation control) for moving to the origin position at the lowest speed in the control (long initialization operation control) is started, and the monitoring state of S109 and S110 described above is entered.

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S110 that the error determination time has elapsed, an operation (non-detection operation) of repeatedly moving the operation target movable body to the origin position (initial position) is performed until the non-startup error determination count is reached. If the operation target movable body is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the operation, the process proceeds to S130 without proceeding to S114.

  On the other hand, if “Y” is determined in S104 and the process proceeds to S120, 0 is set in the operation count counter at detection, and then the operation process data at detection is set (S121a). The timer count is started (S121b). As the timer count of the detection-time operation process timer, the number of signals output at regular intervals from the CTC already initialized in the start-up process is counted in the same manner as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. This can be done by doing so. In addition, the detection-time operation process data of the present embodiment includes a minimum speed (FIG. 44, FIG. 44) as a control speed for operating the operation target movable body, as a later-described actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control). 45)), the minimum control speed for operating the acting subject is described (set).

  Next, the operation target movable body is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the set detection-time operation process data (S122), and it is determined whether or not the process data is completed (S123). If not completed, the process returns to S122, and the operation target movable body is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the operation process data at the time of detection.

  In this way, in the detection operation control, until the detection operation process data is completed, the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the detection operation process data, that is, the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initial At the lowest speed in the control operation), an operation of once leaving the origin position (initial position) and returning from the position away from the origin position (initial position) to the origin position (initial position) is performed (see FIG. 44). The position away from the origin position is a position in the vicinity of the origin position, that is, a position where the detected part of each movable accessory cannot be detected by each origin detection sensor, and is a predetermined position closer to the origin position than each effect position. It is set as (operation position at detection).

  If it is determined in S123 that the set operation process data at the time of detection is completed, the driving of the movable accessory drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S124, and the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. It is determined (confirmed) whether or not the operation target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position).

  If the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, if the operation target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S130.

  On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the operation subject is not located at the origin position (initial position), 1 is added to the detection operation number counter (S126). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the detection-time operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S127). When the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the number of operation error determinations, the process proceeds to S128 to store the origin return error of the action target object (S128), and proceeds to S130. In other words, when the operation target object is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the operation control at the time of detection, the operation control for actual operation confirmation to be described later is not executed for the operation object combination (the operation concerned) The origin return error is stored in order to set the target accessory to the dead end state, and the process proceeds to S130.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the number of times of operation error determination in S127, the mode in which the target object to be operated is in a dead end state is exemplified. The second initialization process is interrupted by starting the error process and executing the error process when the value of the operation count counter at detection reaches the operation error determination number in S113. By doing so, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 may be in a state where it does not start (dead end state).

  In addition, when the action target object is set to the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal (for example, an effect) for operating the movable accessory. It is preferable to execute a process of invalidating reception of a detection signal of a button or the like, or preventing the movable accessory from operating even when the input signal is input.

  In S130, which is executed when “N” is determined in S102, “Y” is determined in S109, or “Y” is determined in S124, the movable body is not yet an operation target. It is determined whether or not the remaining movable body exists, and when there is no remaining movable body (specifically, when the operation target movable body is the rotating combination 201), the actual operation shown in FIG. The process proceeds to the process for performing the confirmation operation control. On the other hand, if there are remaining movable bodies, the process proceeds to S131, the movable body to be operated next is specified, then the process returns to S102, and the above-described processing from S102 is performed on the identified movable object. Do the same.

  When S131 is executed when the action target movable body is the character accessory 200, the arm member 300 is specified as the action target movable body based on the setting data, and the action target movable body is the arm member 300. When S131 is executed in some cases, the finger member 311 is specified as the operation target movable body based on the setting data, and when S131 is executed when the operation target movable body is the finger member 311, Based on the setting data, the rotating combination 201 is specified as the movable object to be operated.

  Next, the processing shown in FIG. 43 will be described. In S200 shown in FIG. 43, the sub CPU 91a first specifies a movable body (confirmation target object) whose operation is to be checked first based on the setting data for the actual operation checking operation. (S200). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a storage of the origin return error of the confirmation target combination or the movable body mounted on the confirmation target combination (S201).

  If there is a storage of the return-to-origin error of the confirmation target combination or the movable body mounted on the confirmation target combination, the process proceeds to S220 without executing the processing from S202 to S210. In this way, in the present embodiment, the actual operation check operation control is not performed for the accessory having the movable body that has been determined as the origin return error in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control. ing.

  On the other hand, if there is no storage of the return-to-origin error of the confirmation target accessory, the process proceeds to S202a to set actual operation confirmation process data corresponding to the confirmation target accessory. That is, if the character object 200 to be confirmed is the character object 200, the process data for confirming the actual operation of the character object 200 is set. If the character object to be confirmed is the rotating character 201, the actual action of the rotating character 201 is set. Set process data for confirmation. In each actual operation check process data, the control speed and the like are described (set) so as to perform the same operation as that actually performed in the Janken production (movable body production) described later in the production. ing. Therefore, the process data for confirming the actual action of the character accessory 200 includes not only the action of the character accessory 200 but also the action of moving the arm member 300 advanced and swung at the driving position by the character accessory 200, The operation of setting 311 to goo, choki or par is also described (set).

  Next, the timer count of the process timer for actual operation confirmation is started (S202b). As the timer count of the process timer for actual operation confirmation, the number of signals output at regular intervals from the CTC already initialized by the start-up process is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. This may be done by counting.

  Then, in the set process data for actual operation confirmation, each movable body of the object to be confirmed is operated at a control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the process timer for actual operation confirmation (S203), It is determined whether or not the process data has been completed (S204). If the process data has not been completed, the process returns to S203, and each movable object of the check target object is set in the process timer for the actual operation confirmation at that time. The operation is performed based on the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value.

  As described above, until the actual operation check process data is completed, the object to be checked is operated at the control speed set in the actual operation check process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. By changing the control speed of the object to be confirmed sequentially in time series, the same acceleration as the control speed set when actually operating the movable object in the movable body effect such as the Janken effect or Deceleration can be performed.

  If it is determined in step S204 that the set process data for actual operation confirmation has been completed, the driving of the movable accessory driving motor is stopped, and is the target accessory an origin target accessory? It is determined whether or not (S204a). If the target character is not the origin detection target character, that is, if it is the rotation character 201, the process proceeds to S220. If the target character is the origin detection target character, that is, if it is the character character 200, The process proceeds to S205. Whether or not all the movable body origin detection sensors (first origin detection sensor 105a, second origin detection sensor 105b, and third origin detection sensor 105c) of the character combination 200 are in a detection state, that is, movement It is determined (confirmed) whether or not all the movable bodies in the target combination are located at the origin position (initial position) (S205).

  If all the origin detection sensors are in the detection state, that is, if all the movable bodies of the confirmation target character are located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when all the origin detection sensors are not in the detection state, that is, when any movable body in the confirmation target object is not located at the origin position (initial position), the origin position (initial position) is set. In order to identify the movable body that is not located and perform the above-described non-detection operation control for the movable body (see FIG. 42) to position the target accessory at the origin position (initial position) S206. Processing of ~ S213 is performed.

  Specifically, after setting 0 to the non-detection operation frequency counter for counting the number of executions of non-detection operation control (S206), the actual operation check operation control (long initialization operation control) is set as the control speed. A minimum control speed for operating the action target character at the same operation speed as the minimum speed in step S207 is set (S207). If the target movable body is the character accessory 200 (main body), the first driving device 99a starts to be driven in the direction of the origin position (initial position) (S208), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S208). S209).

  Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state for monitoring whether the origin detection sensor corresponding to the target movable body is in a detection state and whether the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S210, S211). .

  The target movable body is positioned at the origin position (initial position) by driving the target movable body drive device (for example, the first drive device 99a) in the direction of the origin position (initial position), and the corresponding origin detection sensor is in the detection state. When it becomes, it determines with "Y" in S210, and progresses to S220. On the other hand, if the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, if the target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, the process proceeds to S212. Then, 1 is added to the non-detection operation number counter (S212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3). (S213).

  If the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number, the process proceeds to S220. In the present embodiment, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the process proceeds directly to S220. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the origin return error of the target object to be confirmed is stored, and the storage of the origin return error is not cleared in S222, which will be described later. May be. Alternatively, the effect control main process is interrupted without proceeding to S52 by starting the error process (for example, including error notification) and executing the error process to interrupt the accessory initialization process. The production control board 12 may be in a state where it does not start (dead end state).

  In addition, when the action target object is set to the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal (for example, an effect) for operating the movable accessory. It is preferable to execute a process of invalidating reception of a detection signal of a button or the like, or preventing the movable accessory from operating even when the input signal is input.

  On the other hand, if the value of the non-detection operation number counter has not reached the operation error determination number, the process returns to S207, and the processing of S207, S208, and S209 is performed again, so that the target movable body is used for actual operation confirmation. An operation of moving to the origin position (initial position) at the lowest speed in the operation control (long initialization operation control) (non-detection operation) is started, and the process proceeds to the monitoring state of S210 and S211 described above.

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S211 that the error determination time has elapsed, an operation (non-detection operation) of repeatedly moving the target movable body to the origin position (initial position) is performed until the operation error determination count is reached. If the target movable body is detected at the origin position (initial position) during this time, the process proceeds to S220.

  In S220 executed when “Y” is determined in S201, “N” is determined in S204a, “Y” is determined in S205, or “Y” is determined in S210. , It is determined whether there are any remaining movable actors that are not yet confirmed for operation confirmation, and if there are no remaining movable actors (specifically, If the object is a rotating accessory 201), the origin return error record stored in S114 or S128 is cleared (S222), and the process is terminated, while the remaining movable accessory exists. Then, the process proceeds to S221, and after identifying the movable combination whose operation is to be checked next, the process returns to S201, and the above-described processing from S201 is similarly executed on the identified target combination. Therefore, when the rotating combination 201 is specified in S221, the processing of S202a to S204 is executed, and the operation of rotating the rotating combination 201 during the actual performance is performed as the actual operation confirmation operation. It will be.

  Here, the operation mode and control contents of the movable accessory by executing the accessory initialization process shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. 44 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing operation modes of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the sub CPU 91a. 45A is an explanatory diagram showing a control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, FIG. 45B is an explanatory diagram showing a control speed in the detection-time operation control, and FIG. 45C is a control speed in the non-detection-time operation control. It is explanatory drawing which shows.

  44 and 45, the non-detection operation control (short initialization operation control), the detection operation control (short initialization operation control), and the actual operation confirmation in the character combination 200 that is the origin detection target combination. Only the operation control (long initialization operation control) will be described, and the description of the rotating combination 201 that is not the origin detection target combination will be omitted. Further, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, the character combination 200 (main body) that moves (displaces) in the horizontal direction will be described as an example, but the same applies to the arm member 300 and the finger member 311.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the character accessory 200 (main body) is provided so as to be able to reciprocate between an origin position (initial position) and a drive position (effect position), and travel from the origin position to the drive position. The return operation from the operation or drive position to the origin position is an actual operation that is actually performed in the above-described movable body effect or the like.

  When the sub CPU 91a executes the accessory initialization process, if the detected portion of the target movable body is not detected by the origin detection sensor corresponding to the target movable body, that is, the target movable body is not detected for some reason (for example, transport If it has moved from the home position when installed on the island or amusement islands, or if the home position could not be restored during the previous operation (for example, when performing a production, the A position error other than the origin position (for example, if the product has moved from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine, etc.) To return to the origin when it is at a predetermined position between the origin position and the production position, such as a position indicated by a black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control at 44 Performing a non-detection operation control. When the non-detection operation control is executed, the target movable body is at a position away from the origin position, and therefore, the operation is only an operation of moving the target movable body in the direction of the origin position.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a executes the accessory initialization process, if the detected part of the target movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor corresponding to the target movable body, the sub CPU 91a performs operation control during detection.

  For example, in order to ensure that the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor, a predetermined period between the time when the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor and the operation of the movable accessory in the direction of the origin position is restricted. When an operable range (for example, play) is set, the origin may return and stop at a position that is further shifted away from the position detected by the origin detection sensor. Therefore, even when the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control during detection for returning the movable accessory to the more accurate origin position is performed.

  In this operation control at the time of detection, in order to once cancel the detection state of the detected portion of the target movable body by the origin detection sensor, it is necessary to move the target movable body to a position away from the origin position and then return to the origin position. However, since it is not necessary to move to the effect position, the target movable body is moved from the origin position to the detection operation position in the vicinity of the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the accessory initialization process, and then executes the actual operation confirmation operation control. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same operation as the actual operation actually performed by the object to be confirmed in various effects.

  Next, the control speeds set when the sub CPU 91a executes non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. Note that the speeds shown in FIGS. 45A, 45B, and 45C are control speeds set by the sub CPU 91a to operate each accessory (movable body). It is different from the actual operating speed of the (movable body). That is, for example, when a predetermined movable accessory is operated, even when the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the effect position, If the movement section is different (for example, a section with or without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when moving up and down even in the same moving section, the movable accessory is actually operated. The operation speed in the case of being made may differ from the control speed. Also, even if the same control speed is set for a movable accessory, if there is a difference in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable accessory, the actual operation of each movable accessory The speed is not necessarily the same. In the case where a plurality of movable accessories are operated by a stepping motor having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable accessory, the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, When there is a difference in the driving mechanism or the like, the actual operation speed (actual speed) of each movable accessory is not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (A), when executing the operation control for actual operation confirmation, the sub CPU 91a is set corresponding to the timer count value of the process timer for actual operation confirmation in the set process data for actual operation confirmation. The object to be confirmed is operated based on the control speed. Specifically, control is performed such that after acceleration from the origin position, the vehicle is decelerated and stopped at the effect position, and after acceleration from the effect position is decelerated and stopped at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation check operation control for confirming that each movable accessory can operate normally, the control speed of the movable accessory is changed from low speed → high speed → low speed between the origin position and the drive position. Change in order. That is, when executing the movable body effect of each movable accessory, the sub CPU 91a is within the range of the minimum speed (low speed) as the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the minimum speed. In order to control each movable accessory to operate at a speed of, even when executing the action control for actual operation confirmation, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the second speed that is faster than the minimum speed are used. Control is performed so that each movable accessory operates at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed).

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are actual operating speeds of the movable accessory, and the control speed is set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speed. Will be. In the following, when the movable accessory is operated based on the minimum control speed, it operates at the minimum speed, and when the movable accessory is operated based on the maximum control speed, it operates at the maximum speed. Will be described.

  Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed at the time of acceleration and deceleration of the accessory becomes the minimum speed in the action control for actual operation confirmation. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving (operating) to the effect position (drive position), control is performed so that the speed becomes the minimum speed in the action control for actual operation confirmation over a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. Thus, the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor after the movable accessory is decelerated reliably.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45B, when executing the detection time operation control, the sub CPU 91a moves from the origin position to the effect position (drive position) and operates from the effect position (drive position) to the origin. During the period of movement to the position, control is performed so that the movable accessory always operates at the lowest speed (first speed) in the action control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the sub CPU 91a has a maximum speed in the detection-time operation control as the first operation control that is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in this embodiment, the actual operation confirmation operation). In order to achieve the same speed as the minimum speed in the control), the movable accessory is controlled to operate based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control.

  In the case of detection operation control, the moving distance of the movable accessory is shorter than that of the actual operation check operation control. Because there is a possibility that the detected part cannot be detected reliably by the detection sensor, or the movable accessory etc. may be damaged by an impact when the movable accessory returns to the origin position from a short distance and the movement is restricted. Control to operate at the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45C, when executing the non-detection operation control, the sub CPU 91a always performs actual operation during a period of movement from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. Control is performed so as to operate at the minimum speed (first speed) in the operation control for confirmation. That is, the sub CPU 91a has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control that is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in this embodiment). Control that always operates the movable accessory based on the lowest control speed among the control speeds set in the operation control for actual operation confirmation so that the speed is the same as the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation). I do.

  In this case, since it is unclear how far the target movable body is from the origin position, if the target movable body is located in the vicinity of the origin position, When operating at a high control speed, that is, at a high speed, when the movable accessory returns to the origin position, the detected part cannot be reliably detected by the origin detection sensor, or the movable accessory returns to the origin position from a short distance. Since there is a possibility that the movable accessory or the like may be damaged due to an impact when the movement is restricted, control is performed so as to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a performs the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control based on the minimum control speed set in the actual operation check operation control. Control is performed so that the movable accessory always operates at a single (constant) operation speed. Since these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the action control for actual operation confirmation corresponding to each movable accessory, and are not the operation speeds common to each movable accessory, the minimum speeds in each movable accessory may be different. .

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the arm member 300 and the finger member 311 that are movable bodies are different in size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, and drive mechanism including a drive motor. Even when the same control speed is set, the actual operation speed of the movable body is different. Even when different control speeds are set for each movable accessory, the actual operation speed of the movable accessory is different. As described above, the minimum speed is an operation speed based on the control speed set for each movable accessory, and is controlled so as to operate at the minimum speed optimum for the movable accessory. It is possible to reliably detect the accessory at the origin position.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by executing the above-described accessory initialization process, the movable accessory operates at a speed at which it can be stopped at any timing in the first operation control. Can be made. Specifically, in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the distance to move the movable accessory to the origin position may be shorter than in the actual operation confirmation operation control. By setting the maximum speed in hourly operation control to the minimum speed in action control for actual operation confirmation, the detected part can be reliably detected by the detection means, and the movement restriction is performed while moving the movable accessory at high speed. It is possible to avoid damage due to the impact applied.

  In addition, when performing non-detection operation control or detection operation control, when controlling the movable accessory to operate at a speed lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, non-detection operation control or detection The control speed set when executing the hourly operation control and the minimum control speed set in the action control for actual operation confirmation may be the same control speed or different control speeds.

  Further, when executing the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the sub CPU 91a always sets a single (constant) operation speed that is set in advance, that is, always at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Since the movable body is operated, the operation speed when each movable body is positioned at the origin position can be made constant, and damage of each movable body can be prevented.

  Further, when executing the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the sub CPU 91a always operates each movable body at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation confirmation operation control. By selecting the maximum speed (first speed) that can operate safely without reducing the speed excessively (for example, a speed lower than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation) while ensuring safe operation The period of non-detection operation control and detection operation control can be shortened.

  In addition, when the non-detection operation control is executed, the maximum speed in the non-detection operation control is always equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the detection operation control. Since the movable body is controlled so as to operate, it is possible to grasp whether or not there is a defect in the origin detection sensor corresponding to each movable body. When performing non-detection operation control, it is unclear whether or not the movable accessory is near the origin position, whereas when performing detection operation control, the movable accessory is at the origin position. Therefore, the detection-time operation control may be faster than the non-detection-time operation control and lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control.

  Further, when there is a return of origin return error of the target accessory in step S201 in the accessory initialization process, the sub CPU 91a proceeds to S220 and does not perform the actual operation confirmation operation control. It is possible to prevent a stop at a position other than the origin position during execution of the actual operation check operation control. Specifically, for example, if an operation abnormality occurs during the performance, the movable body may not operate even in the accessory initialization process. However, it is preferable not to execute the actual operation check operation control because a load is only applied to the driving means.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a determines that the movable accessory is not an origin detection target accessory that requires origin detection in the accessory initialization process, the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control are performed. Since it is not performed, only the necessary movable accessory can be subjected to the operation control for actual operation confirmation, and the operation confirmation time by the operation control for actual operation confirmation can be shortened.

  In addition, when performing non-detection operation control or detection operation control as the first operation control, each movable body is controlled to operate at the lowest speed in each actual operation confirmation operation control, and the actual operation confirmation is performed. The actual operation speed (actual speed) of the operation control differs for each movable body. That is, even if the same control speed is set in the first operation control corresponding to each movable body, each movable body is different if there is a difference in size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. Since the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies are not necessarily the same, the period of the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control is shortened while ensuring the safe operation of each movable body by the operation speed according to each movable accessory. be able to. For example, even if the arm member 300 and the finger member 311 are set to the same control speed in the action control for actual operation confirmation, the arm member 300 and the finger member 311 have the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, Since there is a difference in the drive mechanism, the actual operation speed of each movable accessory when the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control are executed is different.

  Specifically, in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, even when the same control speed (minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control) is set, the weight among the plurality of movable bodies. The actual operation speed of the movable body having a large value is slower than the actual operation speed of the movable body having a small weight. Further, when the movable body is raised, the actual operation speed is slower than when the movable body is lowered. In addition, when a spring or the like that urges the movable body in the effect direction is provided as the drive mechanism, when the spring is contracted and moved in a direction against the urging force, the urging force is in a state where the spring is extended. The actual operation speed is slower than when moving in a direction against the above. Thus, in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, when controlling the movable combination so that the movable combination operates at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, In consideration of size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., it is preferable to set an individual minimum control speed in each operation control for actual operation confirmation.

  For example, the first movable part and the second movable part are arranged in front and back so that the second movable part overlaps the front side of the first movable part when viewed from the player when moving toward the origin position. In the case of performing any one of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control, when performing the operation control of both the first movable unit and the second movable unit together, It is preferable to control the operation speed (minimum speed) of the first movable part and the second movable part to be different. In this way, if the first movable part and the second movable part are moved to a position away from the origin position for some reason, the power is turned on, and in the accessory initialization process of S52 When the non-detection operation control of both the first movable part and the second movable part is performed together, the operation speed (minimum speed) of both the first movable part and the second movable part is controlled to be the same. Then, although the situation in which the first movable part is hidden by the second movable part and moves to the origin position becomes difficult to see, the first movable part and the second movable part are controlled so that the minimum speeds are different from each other. Since the movable part and the second movable part move when moving, it becomes easy to confirm the origin return operation of each of the first movable part and the second movable part.

  Further, even when the first movable part and the second movable part larger (or longer) than the first movable part are included, the operation speed (minimum speed) of the first movable part and the second movable part is different. It is preferable to control. In this way, for example, the minimum in any one of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control of the first movable unit which is smaller (or shorter) than the second movable unit and is not noticeable. Since the speed is larger (or longer) than that of the first movable part, it is made slower than the minimum speed in any one of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control of the second movable part that stands out. It becomes easy to confirm the operation of each of the first movable part and the second movable part.

  As described above, when the first movable portion and the second movable portion different from the first movable portion are provided, the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation of the first movable portion and the second movable portion, respectively. It is preferable to control so that the operation speed (minimum speed) in the operation control for operation confirmation is different. In addition, when controlling so that the operation speed (minimum speed) of the 1st movable part and the 2nd movable part differs in this way, operation control at the time of non-detection and operation control at the time of detection of each of the 1st movable part and the 2nd movable part And the minimum control speed set in the operation control for actual operation confirmation may be different or the same.

  Next, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a setting start command has been received (S54). Here, the setting start command is transmitted in S24 of FIG. When the sub control unit 91 receives a setting start command (Y in S54), the sub control unit 91 displays the characters “setting is being changed” (S56, see FIGS. 57B-1 and B-2). Next, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a setting end command has been received (S58). If the sub control unit 91 does not receive the setting end command (N in S58), it waits until it receives the setting end command, and if it receives the setting end command (Y in S58), “ The display of the characters “setting is being changed” is terminated (S60), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the sub-control unit 91 has not received the setting start command (N in S54), the process ends. In addition, in the activation process, in addition to the process of FIG. 41, an error detection process for detecting the presence or absence of an error is executed in each part of the sub-control unit 91. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the information “setting is being changed”, which is predetermined information, is displayed when the accessory initialization process is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the predetermined information, display of “in process of initializing the accessory” is started on the liquid crystal display 51 at the start of the accessory initialization process, and the display is continued during the accessory initialization process. In this way, it may be possible to confirm that the accessory initialization process is in progress, or by executing the processes of S54 to S60 before the accessory initialization process of S52, the accessory initialization process is performed. May be executed, and each accessory is performing an initial operation, and “setting change” may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

[About in-game processing executed by the sub-control unit 91]
Next, in-game processing executed during the game by the sub-control unit 91 will be described. “Playing” means a state after the start-up process is completed. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the game processing. The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT lottery has been executed (S82). When the AT lottery is executed (Y in S82), the sub control unit 91 executes the effect lottery. In the effect lottery, one of the announcement effect described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53, the Janken effect described with reference to FIG. When execution of the janken production is determined by the production lottery, the type of janken production is determined using the production table shown in FIG. 47 (S84). The Janken production is a production including a production production and an AT result production. The roaring effect is an effect (an effect that suggests the possibility of winning the AT) that states whether or not the AT is won. Further, the AT result effect is an effect that is executed after execution of the roaring effect, and is an effect that indicates the result of the AT lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the roaring effect is an effect in which the character combination 200 and the enemy character image 400 shake hands with each other, as shown in FIG. The roaring effect is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). When the AT winning is performed by the AT lottery executed in S82 after the roaring effect, the winning effect in which the character combination 200 wins the Janken is executed as the AT result effect. On the other hand, when the AT is not won by the AT lottery executed in S82, a defeat effect that the character combination 200 loses to Janken is executed as the AT result effect. FIG. 56C shows a victory effect.

  Furthermore, there are a flame production, a small flame production, and a large flame production. The small flame effect is an effect of displaying a small flame image at a location where the enemy character image 400 shakes his hand. The large flame effect is an effect of displaying a large flame image at a location where the enemy character image 400 shakes his hand. The flameless effect is an effect in which the character object 200 and the enemy character image 400 shake hands with each other without displaying a flame image. FIG. 56B shows a large flame effect in which a flame image 310 that is a large flame is displayed. The small flame effect is an effect in which a flame image smaller than the large flame is displayed (not particularly shown).

  FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the Janken production table. FIG. 47 (A) is a table for determining the Janken effect when AT is not won. FIG. 47B is a table for determining the Janken effect when winning an AT.

  In the example of FIGS. 47 (A) and 47 (B), flameless loss, small flame loss, large flame loss, no flame win, small flame win, and large flame win are defined. “Lose without flame” refers to an effect in which a flameless effect is executed as a groaning effect and a defeat effect is executed as an AT result effect. Small flame defeat refers to an effect in which a small flame effect is executed as a sword effect and a defeat effect is executed as an AT result effect. Defeating a large flame refers to an effect in which a large flame effect is executed as a sword effect and a defeat effect is executed as an AT result effect. A flameless win refers to an effect in which a flameless effect is executed as a groaning effect and a victory effect is executed as an AT result effect. The small flame win refers to an effect in which a small flame effect is executed as a groaning effect and a victory effect is executed as an AT result effect. The big flame win refers to an effect in which a large flame effect is executed as an angry effect and a victory effect is executed as an AT result effect.

  In FIG. 47A, the execution probabilities of losing without flame, losing small flame, and losing large flame are defined as 98%, 1%, and 1%. In FIG. 47B, the execution probabilities of winning without flame, winning small flame, and winning big flame are 50%, 25%, and 25% when the number of granted AT games is 1 to 150. Yes. Further, when the number of granted AT games is 151 to 300, the execution probabilities of winning without flame, winning small flame, and winning big flame are defined as 10%, 20%, and 70%.

  The description returns to FIG. When the process of S84 ends, the process proceeds to S86. On the other hand, when the AT lottery is not executed (N in S82), the process proceeds to S86 without performing S84.

  In S86, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the mission achievement condition is satisfied. FIG. 48 shows an example of the mission database. This mission database is stored in the ROM 91b. In the example of FIG. 48, the mission achievement condition and the start timing of the mission achievement notification when the mission is achieved are defined for each mission. Further, when the mission achievement condition is established, the sub-control unit 91 gives an experience value corresponding to the mission corresponding to the mission achievement condition.

  In this embodiment, there are 100 types of missions. Hereinafter, the mission identification information will be described as a mission reference code. For example, the mission of the mission identification information M1 is assumed to be the mission M1. For example, the mission achievement condition of the mission M1 is a condition that is established when the bell wins five times after being controlled during the game history update period.

  Further, the mission achievement condition of the mission M3 is a condition that is established when the Janken production (see FIG. 56) is executed. Further, the mission achievement condition of the mission M5 is a condition that is satisfied by using 500 games after being controlled during the game history update period. In addition, when the mission achievement condition of mission M3 or the mission achievement condition of mission M5 is established, the character accessory 200 operates. Thus, in the missions, there are missions (hereinafter referred to as “object-related missions”) in which the character actor 200 operates by accomplishing such missions M3 and M5.

  In S86, if it is determined that any mission achievement condition among the missions M1 to M100 is established (Y in S86), the mission achievement condition for the accessory-related mission (mission M3, M5, etc.) is established. It is determined whether or not (S88). If the sub-control unit 91 determines that the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is satisfied (Y in S88), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the character accessory 200 is detected by the driving position sensor 106 (S90). . When it is determined YES in S90, that is, when it is determined that the character accessory 200 is normally displaced to the driving position, the process proceeds to S96. In S <b> 96, the sub-control unit 91 performs notification of an accomplished mission (hereinafter referred to as mission achievement notification). For example, when the mission achievement condition of the mission M1 is satisfied, the characters “Mission M1 accomplished! Congratulations!” Are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. At the same time, the sub-control unit 91 gives an experience value corresponding to the mission M1 (adds and updates the experience value stored in the game history database shown in FIG. 39A).

  On the other hand, if the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is not satisfied (N in S88), the sub-control unit 91 performs the process of S96 without performing the process of S90, and ends the process. .

  If the character position 200 is not detected by the driving position sensor 106 (N in S90), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the completion of the character-related mission (S92). When the sub-control unit 91 determines that a predetermined time has elapsed since the time of the achievement related missions condition (Y in S92), the accessory control process is performed (S94), and the mission achievement notification is executed (S96). The process ends.

  Here, the processing of S92 will be described. When the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is satisfied (Y in S88), if the first driving device 99a is normal, the character accessory 200 is normally displaced. Therefore, it should be determined YES in S90. However, when YES is determined in S88, if the character combination 200 is not detected by the driving position sensor 106 for a predetermined time (S92), the first driving device 99a has failed or has failed. It is likely. In such a case, an accessory error process (S94) is executed.

  In the accessory error process, for example, the fact that the accessory is an error may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, an error signal indicating that an accessory is an error may be output to a hall computer (not shown) installed in the game store. Thereby, it can be notified to the store clerk that the 1st drive device 99a is out of order.

  Further, after the completion of the processing of S94, the mission achievement notification of S96 is executed and an experience value is given. That is, even when the character combination 200 is not detected by the drive position sensor 106, the mission achievement notification is executed and the experience value is given. This is because if the mission achievement notification is not executed because the first drive device 99a is out of order even though the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission has been established, it becomes severe for the player. There is a risk of reducing interest. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is satisfied, the mission achievement notification and experience value assignment are performed regardless of whether or not the character accessory 200 is detected by the drive position sensor 106. Thereby, it can prevent reducing the interest of a game. It is assumed that the predetermined time is a time that can be determined that the first drive device 99a is out of order and that is measured in advance. The predetermined time in this embodiment is, for example, 10 seconds.

  In S88, for at least some of the mission achievement conditions of the missions M1 to M100 (hereinafter referred to as “specific missions”), two missions have been achieved once after being controlled during the game history update period. Even if the above is achieved, it may be determined that the established mission achievement condition is not achieved. For example, a case where the specific mission is mission 1 will be described. When the bell has won five times after being controlled during the game history update period, it is determined YES in S86. Furthermore, when the bell wins five times (that is, when the bell wins ten times after being controlled in the game history update period), it is determined NO in S86. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the mission achievement notification and the experience value assignment from being executed.

  Further, the character combination 200 may be operated even when the mission achievement condition of the combination related mission is satisfied. For example, the character combination 200 may be operated with a predetermined probability (including 100%) when a predetermined combination operation condition is established. The accessory operating condition is preferably a condition that is advantageous to the player. For example, the accessory operating condition may be a condition established by winning a bonus.

[Reel control when winning a small role]
49 to 53 are diagrams for explaining the reel control at the time of winning the small role. 49 to 53, the case where the execution of the notice effect is determined in the effect lottery executed when the AT lottery target combination is won will be described. By executing the announcement effect, it is possible to indicate which lottery target role has been won. A character image (for example, a symbol indicating cherry or a symbol indicating watermelon) displayed on the invalid line is displayed on the invalid line, even though these effects are being executed. In such a case, the display result on the invalid line may be mistaken as a game result.

  In the present embodiment, the following reel control is performed in relation to the symbols actually displayed on the winning line LN in order to prevent the player from misidentifying the images displayed in such notification effects. Running. FIG. 49 shows the reel control when the strong cherry lip or the weak cherry lip is won. In FIG. 49, the stop operation is executed in the order of stop of left, middle, and right. When the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, and right stop, the stop switch 8L is stopped by aiming the 3rd red 7 pattern shown in FIG. 5 in the left reel 2L within the frame of the fluoroscopic window 3 (the upper position of the frame). Let If you press the stop switch in such a position, you can prevent the cherry and watermelon from being dropped. When the strong cherry lip is won, a notification effect is displayed in which the cherry character image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

  49A to 49C show a case where the operation is performed at the timing when the eye pressing is successful, and FIGS. 49D to 49F show a case where the operation is performed at the timing when the eye pressing fails. The timing when the eye will be successful and the timing when the eye will fail will be described in detail with reference to FIG. For example, when the left reel 2L is first stopped at the time of strong cherry lip winning, the timing when the second cherry symbol of FIG. Since the range from the second cherry symbol to the symbol four frames ahead is the range that can be pulled in, the 18th blank symbol, the 19th replay symbol, the 20th bell symbol, the 1st watermelon symbol of the left reel 2L When the stop operation of the stop switch 8L is executed in the lower position or when the second cherry symbol is in the lower position of the left reel 2L, the cherry symbol is stopped in the lower position of the left reel 2L. Is possible. Such a case is the timing when the target is successful. In addition, when the stop operation of the stop switch 8L is executed when the 3rd red 7 design to the 17th bar design are in the lower position of the left reel 2L, the cherry design stops at the lower position of the left reel 2L. It becomes impossible to make it. Such a case is the timing at which the failure to push is made.

  When the stop switch 8L is stopped at the timing when the strong cherry lip winning is achieved, the cherry symbol is stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 2L as shown in FIG. 49 (a). Subsequently, the stop switch 8 </ b> C is stopped by aiming the third red 7 symbol shown in FIG. 5 in the frame of the see-through window 3 in the middle reel 2 </ b> C. When the stop switch 8C is stopped at the timing when the pressing is successful, the cherry symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel as shown in FIG. 49 (b). Further, since the cherry symbols are always arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R, when the strong cherry lip is won, the cherry symbols always stop at the upper stage as shown in FIG. 49 (c). As shown in FIG. 49 (c), three cherry symbols stop on the winning line LN, and the re-game player wins. This shows the case where the symbol combination indicating the winning of the lip 15 at the time of the strong cherry lip winning shown in FIG. 15 is derived.

  In addition, when the stop switch 8L is stopped at the timing when the pressing of the strong cherry lip is failed, the replay symbol stops at the lower stage of the left reel 2L as shown in FIG. 49 (d). Next, when the stop switch 8C is operated to stop in the middle reel 2C at the timing of successful pressing, the replay symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel as shown in FIG. 49 (e). However, since the cherry pattern is always arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R, the right reel 2R does not receive the FIG. ) The cherry symbol always stops at the top as shown. As shown in FIG. 49 (f), on the winning line LN, the symbols are stopped by the symbol combination of replay-replay-cherry, and the re-game player wins. This shows a case where the symbol combination indicating the winning of the lip 16 at the time of the strong cherry lip winning shown in FIG. 15 is derived.

  When the left reel 2L is successfully pressed and the center reel 2C is unsuccessfully pressed, the cherry-replay-cherry symbol combination is displayed on the winning line LN. When the left reel 2L fails to be pressed and the center reel 2C is successfully pressed, the replay-cherry-cherry symbol combination is displayed on the winning line LN. In any case, a cherry symbol is displayed on the winning line LN (upper stage of the right reel 2R).

  When the sub-control unit 91 performs an effect suggesting that the cherry lip is won, and when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at the timing of successful pressing as shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to (c), the left Cherry symbols are arranged on the winning line LN including the reel 2L and the middle reel 2C. Further, when the sub-control unit 91 performs an effect suggesting that the cherry lip is won, and as shown in FIGS. 49D to 49F, when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at the timing when the pressing failure occurs. The replay symbols are aligned on the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN, while the cherry symbols are derived on the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. Thus, even when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at a timing different from the success timing, the display result indicating the cherry lip winning is derived to the right reel 2R on the pay line LN. That is, the symbol displayed in the notice effect is always displayed on the winning line LN. Therefore, it is possible to indicate that the display result displayed on the winning line LN is the cherry lip winning both at the timing when the pressing is successful and at the timing when the pressing fails, and the display result displayed on the winning line LN. Can be prevented from being misunderstood as a result of a game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at the timing when the strong cherry lip is won, when only the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C are on the winning line LN. The right reel 2R also has cherry patterns. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the cherry symbols are derived to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, the cherry symbols can also be derived to the right reel 2R, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c) and 49 (f). In addition, the control content for the right reel 2R can be shared.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c) and 49 (f), even if the pressing is successful and cherry symbols are derived for all the reels, the pressing fails and the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C Even if the cherry symbol is not derived and the cherry symbol is derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN, the re-game player wins as a strong cherry lip winning. Therefore, a winning occurs even if the cherry symbols are not derived to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 49 (g), when the stop switches 8L to 8R are stopped at the timing when the hit is successful at the time of winning the weak cherry lip, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN are operated. The cherry symbols are derived on the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. Instead, in the right reel, a cherry symbol is derived on the invalid line LM4 (lower stage of the right reel 2R). Therefore, when a winning suggestion effect that suggests a cherry lip winning is executed and a stop operation is executed at the timing when the winning is successful, the strong cherry lip winning is weak depending on the position of the cherry symbol on the right reel 2R. You can check if the cherry lip is won. FIG. 49 (g) shows a case where a symbol combination indicating the winning of Lip 15 at the time of weak cherry lip winning is derived.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 49 (h), when the stop switches 8L to 8R are stopped at the timing when the weak cherry lip wins, the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN are stopped. The replay symbol is derived and the cherry symbol is derived on the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. The symbol combination (Replay-Replay-Cherry) on the winning line LN is the same as the symbol combination on the winning line LN when the stop switches 8L to 8R are stopped at the timing when the hit is failed in the strong cherry lip winning. It is. Therefore, it can be shown that the display result displayed on the winning line LN is a cherry lip winning, and the misrecognition of the display result displayed on the winning line LN can be prevented. Note that since the same display result is derived in FIG. 49 (f) and FIG. 49 (h), it can be determined that the cherry lip has been won, but the strength of the cherry lip cannot be determined.

  In addition, if only one of the left reel 2L or the middle reel 2C was successfully pressed when winning the weak cherry lip, the cherry pattern was derived on the winning line LN of the reel that was successfully pressed and failed. The reel is controlled so as to derive a replay symbol. Then, with respect to the right reel 2R, control for deriving the cherry symbol on the pay line LN (upper stage of the right reel 2R) is performed.

  FIG. 50 shows the case where the middle cherry lip is won. In FIG. 50, stop operations are executed in the order of stop in the middle, left, and right. When the middle reel 2 </ b> C is first stopped, the stop switch 8 </ b> L is stopped by aiming the third red 7 symbol shown in FIG. 5 within the frame of the see-through window 3. The red 7 symbol is a symbol that is common to the cherry symbol and the red color.

  When the middle reel 2C is operated at the timing when the middle reel 2C is successfully pressed, the red 7 symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 2C as shown in FIG. 50 (a). Further, when the left reel 2L is operated at a timing when the left reel 2L is successfully pressed, the cherry symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel 2L as shown in FIG. 50 (b). Further, when the right reel 2R is operated at the timing when it is successfully pushed, the cherry symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 2R and the red 7 symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 2R as shown in FIG. 50 (c). To do. FIG. 50 (c) shows a combination of symbols in the case where BB5 is simultaneously won together with the middle stage cherry winning. Thus, not only the arrangement of the cherry symbols on the right reel 2R but also the red 7 symbols on the middle reel 2C can suggest the cherry lip winning, and the result of the game that will win the cherry is not on the winning line LN. Can be prevented.

  When the stop switch is operated at a timing when both the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C fail to be pressed, a replay symbol is derived on the winning line LN for the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, and the right reel A cherry symbol is derived on the upper stage of 2R. That is, the same control as that in FIG. 49 (f) and FIG. 49 (h) is executed. In this way, it is possible to share the control when executed at the timing when the hit failure occurs regardless of whether the weak cherry lip, the strong cherry lip, or the middle cherry lip is won. In addition, when only one of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C is successfully pressed, a cherry symbol is derived on the winning line LN of the reel that has been successfully pressed, and a replay symbol is displayed for the failed reel. Reel control to be derived is performed. Then, with respect to the right reel 2R, control for deriving the cherry symbol on the pay line LN (upper stage of the right reel 2R) is performed.

  FIG. 51 shows a case where a watermelon is won. In FIG. 51, the stop operation is executed in the order of stop of left, middle, and right. 51A to 51C show a case where the operation is performed at the timing when the eye press fails. The timing of failure to press will be specifically described with reference to FIG. For example, when the left reel 2L is stopped for the first time when a watermelon is won, when the first watermelon symbol, the sixth watermelon symbol, and the eleventh watermelon symbol in FIG. 5 can be stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 2L. This is the timing. The timing at which the 12th bell symbol to the 16th bar symbol are stopped at the timing at which they are stopped at the upper stage of the left reel 2L is the timing at which the pressing failure occurs.

  If the stop switch 8L is operated to stop when the watermelon is won, the BAR symbol stops at the upper stage of the left reel 2L as shown in FIG. The BAR symbol is a symbol used as a symbol constituting the watermelon. Next, since the watermelon symbols are always arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C, the middle reel 2C is placed in the middle stage as shown in FIG. 51 (b) regardless of the timing of pushing the watermelon. The watermelon design will always stop. Further, when the stop switch 8R is stopped at the timing when the pushing failure occurs when the watermelon is won, the blank symbol a (bra a) stops at the lower stage of the right reel 2R as shown in FIG. 51 (c).

  Since the watermelon symbol is always arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C, as shown in FIG. 51, when the watermelon is won, the reel control is executed so that the watermelon symbol is always displayed in the middle stage in the middle reel 2C. can do. In this way, by displaying the watermelon symbol on the winning line, the symbol displayed in the notice effect is always displayed on the winning line LN. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the result of the game for winning the watermelon is not on the winning line LN.

  FIG. 52 shows a case where a strong cherry lip, a weak cherry lip, or a middle cherry lip is won. In FIG. 52, stop operations are executed in the order of right, middle, and left stops. As shown in FIG. 52A, the right reel 2R is first stopped from when the reel is rotating. As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the right reel 2R is stopped for the first time, when the cherry lip is won, a cherry symbol always appears on the upper stage of the right reel 2R on the winning line. Therefore, the cherry lip winning can be suggested at the stage of the first stop. However, at this time point, it is unclear which symbols are stopped on the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, so it is not known whether the cherry lip is strong, weak, or middle.

  When the stop switches 8L and 8C are stopped at the timing when the hit is successful, the cherry symbols are aligned on the winning line as shown in FIG. Further, when the stop switches 8L and 8C are stopped at the timing when the hit is successful, at the time of winning the weak cherry lip, as shown in FIG. 52 (d), the replay-cherry-cherry is on the winning line. The pattern is complete. Further, when the stop switches 8L and 8C are stopped at the timing when the pressing is successful, when the middle stage cherry lip is selected, as shown in FIG. 52 (e), on the invalid line LM2 (the middle stage of the left reel 2L). The cherry design is derived. FIG. 52 (e) shows the case where the bonus and the middle cherry lip are won simultaneously. In the case of the middle stage cherry lip winning alone, there is no red 7 pattern on the right.

  As described above, when the right reel 2R is first stopped at the time of cherry lip winning, the cherry symbol is derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. Therefore, it can be suggested that the display result displayed on the winning line LN before the operation of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C is a cherry win. That is, it is suggested at the time of the first stop that the symbol displayed in the announcement effect is displayed on the winning line LN. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the result of the game in which the cherry tree is won is not on the winning line LN.

  FIG. 53 shows a case where a watermelon is won. In FIG. 53, stop operations are executed in the order of middle, right, and left stops. As shown in FIG. 53A, the middle reel 2C is first stopped from when the reel is rotating. As shown in FIG. 53B, when the middle reel 2C is stopped for the first time, when the watermelon is won, a watermelon symbol always appears in the middle stage of the middle reel 2C on the winning line. Therefore, a watermelon winning can be suggested at the stage of the first stop.

  As described above, when the middle reel 2C is first stopped at the time of winning the watermelon, the watermelon symbol is derived to the middle reel 2C on the winning line LN. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of the display result displayed on the winning line before the operation of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R.

[Notification mode of various notification units]
Next, the notification mode of the predetermined notification units (1BETLED14, 2BETLED15, 3BETLED16 (BET display unit), payout number display unit 12 (game assist display), transmissive area 51b (winning display unit)) will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining a notification mode of various notification units.

  54 (a) to 54 (c) show the notification states of the various notification units when a middle bell win is generated as a small role winning as a result of playing a game (game). FIGS. 54D to 54F show the notification states of various notification units when the initial state is reached due to the establishment of various conditions. For example, when the middle bell wins, nine medals are paid out as shown in FIG. When the middle bell wins, the BET display unit is kept in the lit state as shown in FIG. 54 (a). When the middle bell wins, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the payout number display unit 12 is displayed with a value indicating nine. The payout amount display unit 12 is displayed by segment display. When the middle bell wins, the reel LED 55 indicates that the middle bell has won, as shown in FIG. 54 (c). It can be confirmed by the winning display section that the portion corresponding to the bell symbol (the index symbol shown in FIG. 11) shown in the middle of the reels 2L to 2R emits light.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 54A to 54C, when 30 seconds elapse without a BET operation after the small bell winning of the middle bell is generated, the various notification units are displayed in FIG. ) To (f), the display mode changes to the initial state. For example, when 30 seconds have elapsed from the state of FIG. 54A, the display mode of the BET display unit changes to the LED off state shown in FIG. 54D. Also, the payout amount display unit 12 changes from the display of “09” shown in FIG. 54B to the state of “00” shown in FIG. Further, the winning display section changes from the lighting state of the reel LED 55 shown in FIG. 54C to the light-off state of the reel LED 55 shown in FIG.

  Here, the elapsed time of 30 seconds may be timed by a timer (not shown) that starts counting after the display by the payout of the small role provided on the game control board 40 side is executed. Further, with regard to the lighting time of the reel LED 55, the light-off control may be executed based on the information related to the timer timing transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub-control unit 91. It should be noted that the timing for starting the small role winning may be from the time when the three reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped or from the time when the payout of medals is completed.

  Here, 30 seconds shown as the predetermined time is the same time as the transition time to the specific mode. The specific mode is a mode for executing a demonstration production (demonstration production). In the demonstration effect, for example, a character that appears in the effect of the slot machine 1 in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, the content of the story, a video that describes the effect to be executed, and the like flow. In order to cancel the demonstration effect as the specific mode, it is only necessary to insert a medal or perform a BET operation.

  In the specific mode, the power saving mode may be entered after 30 seconds have passed as the predetermined time. The power saving mode is a mode in which the amount of light and the volume are reduced compared to during the game in order to suppress power consumption in the slot machine 1 when the player is not playing a game. For example, in the power saving mode, the amount of light in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 is reduced and the volume is set to none. In the display area, a “power saving mode” character indicating the current power saving mode is displayed. To cancel the power saving mode as the specific mode, it is sufficient to insert a medal or perform a BET operation.

  In this way, the demonstration effect is executed after 30 seconds from the end of the previous game. Therefore, the timer for counting 30 seconds from the small role winning and the timer for timing that the demonstration effect is executed after 30 seconds from the end of the previous game can be made common. Alternatively, the power saving mode may be set after 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the previous game. In this way, a timer for timing 30 seconds from the small role winning and a timer for timing the switching to the power saving mode after 30 seconds from the end of the previous game can be shared.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the display state of the various notification units changes from the display state shown in FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (c) to the state shown in FIGS. 54 (d) to 54 (f). The display state changes to the initial display state indicated by. The setting change state is a state in which the setting value can be changed by the reset / setting switch 38. A power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a. The power supply box 100 is provided with a keyhole into which a store clerk inserts a setting key in order to switch to a setting change state when the power is turned on (at startup). When the key operation of turning the setting key owned by the store clerk to the right is inserted into the keyhole, the setting key switch 37 is turned on. A state in which the setting key switch 37 is turned on is a setting change state. On the other hand, when the key operation is performed by turning the setting key to the left while being inserted into the keyhole, the setting key switch 37 is turned off.

  Since the setting key switch 37 cannot be operated unless the front door 1b is unlocked and opened, a person other than the store clerk who owns the door key cannot operate the setting key switch 37 from the outside. Furthermore, since the setting key switch 37 cannot be operated unless the setting key is inserted into the keyhole, a person other than the store clerk who owns the setting key cannot operate the setting key switch 37.

  Further, the power box 100 includes a setting switch 38 for changing the set value of the winning probability (payout rate) of the internal lottery in the setting change state, and a power switch 39 operated when the power is turned on / off. Is provided. Here, a state in which the set value can be confirmed by displaying the set value read from the RAM on the set value display 24 is referred to as a setting confirmation state.

  54 (a) to 54 (c) at the time of winning a small role, the display state of the various notification units is changed to the setting change state, thereby returning to the display state of FIGS. 54 (d) to (f) as the initial state. Change.

  Further, when there is a settlement operation in which the credit and the set number of bets are settled by pressing the settlement switch 10, the display states of the various notification units shown in FIGS. 54 (a) to (c) are shown in FIG. The display state changes to the initial display state of 54 (d) to (f). Also, as a result of the BET operation for setting the number of bets by operating the MAXBET switch 6 or the like, the BET display unit immediately changes from the lit state of FIG. 54 (a) to the unlit state of FIG. ) Is lit. Further, the payout amount display unit 12 and the winning display unit are changed from the display state as shown in FIGS. 54B and 54C to the initial state as shown in FIGS. 54E and 54F by the BET operation.

  The slot machine 1 has a backup power source. Therefore, even when a sudden power interruption (for example, a power failure) occurs, information stored in the backup area for a predetermined period by supplying backup power to the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91. Can be held. When the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 return from the power interruption, the display of various notification units in FIGS. 54A to 54C before the power interruption is performed based on the information and flags saved in the backup area. From the state, after the power interruption is restored by turning on the power again, the control is performed again to the states of FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (c). Then, the various informing units are configured as shown in FIGS. 54D to 54F after 30 seconds have elapsed since the power failure recovery process for recovering from the power interruption is completed and the game process for starting the game is started. Display state. Also, if a power interruption occurs during the rotation of the reel, the reel is returned to the initial position after the recovery, and the various informing units complete a power interruption recovery process to recover from the power interruption and start the game. When the time of 30 seconds elapses after the processing is started, the display states shown in FIGS.

  Here, a description will be given of the preparation that has been performed in the past in order to know whether or not the set value has been changed from the closing of the hall (game room) on the previous day at the start of business on the next day. The preparation is an act of winning a winning combination when the store is closed on the previous day and ending the game in a state where a number of “1” or more is displayed on the payout number display portion 12 (the state of FIG. 54 (b)). . If the value is maintained at the start of business the next day due to such an action (the state of FIG. 54 (b)), if the setting has not been changed and the display content is “0” ( It is found that the setting change has been made (state shown in FIG. 54 (e)). In addition, it has been easily understood that the setting has not been changed if the BET display portion and the winning display portion are kept lit at the start of business the next day.

  As a countermeasure against such preparation, the store clerk of the hall had to execute the game a plurality of times after closing the store in order to set the display of the payout amount display unit 12 to “0”. Further, even when the display of the payout amount display unit 12 can be set to “0” by the settlement operation or the BET operation, it is necessary to perform the settlement operation or the BET operation after closing the store, which is troublesome. .

  In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the preparation while reducing the work load of the store clerk in such a hall, a small role winning is generated, and 30 from the state where the number of medals paid out is displayed on the payout number display unit 12. As the second elapses, control is executed to change the display on the payout amount display unit 12 to “0” which is the initial state. Similarly, the BET operation unit and the winning display unit are controlled to change from the lighting state to the initial off state when 30 seconds have passed since the small role winning.

[Display pattern of the payout amount display area]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining a display pattern of the payout amount display section (game auxiliary display) 12. The display pattern of the payout amount display unit 12 can be displayed in a pattern as shown in FIG. In the table of FIG. 55, the left-hand column for replay winning etc. indicates the state in the slot machine 1. In the patterns A to C, which are display patterns of the payout number display unit 12, “initial” indicates an initial state of display on the payout number display unit 12 (for example, FIG. 54 (e)). "" Indicates a state where the display of the payout amount display unit 12 is maintained (for example, FIG. 54 (b)). The payout amount display unit 12 is controlled to the “initial” or “maintained” state indicated by “◯” in the table in the state of the slot machine 1. “X” in the table indicates an uncontrolled state. In addition, “-” in the table indicates the initial state when the lever is operated because the payout amount display unit 12 is changed to the initial state during the BET operation in the operation of starting a series of games from the BET operation to the lever operation. It has been shown. Although the case where “0” is displayed on the payout amount display unit 12 as an initial state is shown, the initial state may be indicated by a symbol other than 0, or a combination of 0 and a symbol (for example, “ 0. ”) or the display may be turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in any of the A to C patterns, the payout amount display unit 12 is in an initial state when a replay winning as a replaying combination is made. In addition, during the settlement operation, the A pattern and the B pattern have the payout number display unit 12 in the initial state, but in the C pattern, the display of the payout number display unit 12 is maintained. In a series of operations from the BET operation to the lever operation, in the A pattern, the display of the payout number display unit 12 is maintained during the BET operation, but the payout number display unit 12 is in the initial state during the lever operation. In the B pattern and the C pattern, the payout amount display unit 12 is in the initial state when the BET is operated, and remains in the initial state when the lever is operated.

  Further, when 30 seconds elapse after the game is stopped, the payout number display unit 12 is in an initial state in the A pattern, and the display of the payout number display unit 12 is maintained in the B pattern and the C pattern. In addition, after the setting change state (after default), the payout amount display unit 12 is in the initial state (default state) in any of the A to C patterns. In addition, after returning from the power interruption, the display on the payout number display unit 12 is maintained in the state before the power interruption in any of the patterns A to C. The display state of the payout amount display unit 12 is not limited to the patterns A to C, and may be a combination of the initial state or the state in which the display is maintained in each state.

[About Janken production]
Next, details of the Janken production will be described with reference to FIG. When the Janken production is determined by the production lottery, when the Janken production is started, the character accessory 200 is displaced from the initial position (see FIG. 4) to the driving position (the position in FIG. 56A). Further, the arm member 300 concealed by the character accessory 200 is projected. In the Janken production, the character combination 200 functions as a teammate character.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (A), the banken effect is started by causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display a notification image for notifying that the janken effect is started, such as “Janken chance”. Further, the sub control unit 91 electronically displays the enemy character image 400 as an enemy character in an area on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. In this way, the enemy character image 400 and the character combination 200 (friend character) face each other in the left-right direction.

  Thereafter, the sub-control unit 91 outputs, for example, voices such as “Jan” and “Ken” from the speakers 53 and 54 in accordance with the time signature of “Jan” and “Ken” as a squealing effect. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 swings the arm member 300 of the character accessory 200 in the vertical direction in accordance with the time signature of “Jan” and “Ken” as a turning effect. At the same time, the sub-control unit 91 executes the determined beat effect (any one of the flameless effect, the small flame effect, and the large flame effect) as the beat effect. In addition, the enemy character image 400 is also displayed in a manner in which the arm is waving as a scolding effect.

  After this roaring effect is completed, an AT result effect as shown in FIG. 56C is executed. The sub-control unit 91 outputs, for example, a sound such as “Pon” from the speakers 53 and 54 in accordance with the time signature “Pon” of Janken. Also, the sub-control unit 91 changes the finger member 311 of the arm member 300 of the character accessory 200 to goo, choki, or par as shown in FIG. Let As described above, the finger member 311 of the arm member 300 has a structure that can be changed to one of goo, choki, and par as controlled by the control of the sub-control unit 91. FIG. 56 (C) shows an example in which the finger member 311 has a choke as a decisive factor. Further, the sub control unit 91 displays an effect image 320 corresponding to the shape of the finger member 311 after the change at the position overlapping the arm member 300 of the character accessory 200. In the present embodiment, a shadow image indicating the shadow of the arm member 300 is displayed as the effect image 320. Thereby, a decisive factor can be shown in three dimensions. In the example of FIG. 56C, an effect image 320 simulating a decisive factor is displayed.

  On the other hand, the enemy character image 400 is also changed to an image in which any one of goo, choki and par is taken as a decisive factor. The sub-control unit 91 maintains the changed shape of the finger member 311 of the character accessory 200 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and also displays the enemy character image 400 that has made a decisive action for the predetermined time, Let it continue. Although not shown in FIG. 56C, when AT is won, an image such as “Janken wins! AT game 300 game GET!” Is displayed. On the other hand, when AT is not selected, an image such as “Janken defeat! Sorry!” Is displayed.

[Differences in the display of the liquid crystal display 51 between the turning effect execution and the startup process execution]
Next, a difference in display on the liquid crystal display 51 between the execution of the turning effect and the execution of the startup process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 (A) shows the state during execution of the turning effect, and FIG. 57 (B) shows the initial action (S52) of the character accessory 200 during the start-up process (see FIG. 41). is there.

  FIG. 57 (A-1) shows the character combination 200 and the display of the liquid crystal display 51 during the execution of the turning effect. FIG. 57 (A-2) is obtained by omitting the character combination 200 of FIG. 57 (A-1). As shown in FIGS. 57 (A-1) and (A-2), the flame image 310, the enemy character image 400, and the character “Janken” are displayed as the decoration display during the execution of the roaring effect.

  FIG. 57 (B-1) shows the character combination 200 and the display on the liquid crystal display 51 during the start-up process. FIG. 57 (B-2) is obtained by omitting the character combination 200 of FIG. 57 (B-1). As described in S52 of FIG. 41, in the activation process by the sub-control unit 91, the character combination 200 is displaced to the driving position as the initial operation (non-detection operation control or detection operation control) of the character combination 200. Is executed. As shown in FIGS. 57 (B-1) and (B-2), the decoration display shown in FIG. 57 (A-2) is not executed during the execution of the startup process, and the characters “settings are being changed” (see FIG. 57). 41 (see S56). When this character is not controlled to the setting change state (that is, when the setting start command is not transmitted in S24 of FIG. 40), no image is displayed.

  Although not particularly illustrated, after the character action 200 waving for 5 seconds as shown in FIG. 57 (B-1) as the initial action of the character action 200 during the activation process, a predetermined action is performed. A decisive factor (in this embodiment, goo) is issued. When the character combination 200 takes the predetermined rule, the displayed effect image 320 is not displayed during the Janken production.

[Main effects obtained by the first embodiment]
Next, main effects obtained by the first embodiment will be described.
(1) According to the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), during the game (for example, during the execution of the roaring effect), when the character accessory 200 is displaced to the driving position, the decoration display (FIG. The display of the 56 (B) flame image 310, the enemy character image 400, the character “Janken”, the effect image 320 of FIG. 56 (C), etc.) is executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. If an ornament display similar to that performed when the roaring effect is performed during the initial operation of the gaming machine (during the start-up process), a store clerk or the like confirms the initial operation of the character accessory 200. The decoration display may hinder the confirmation of the character accessory 200 to the initial operation. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the decoration display is not executed during the initial operation of the gaming machine (during the startup process). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the character combination 200 from being obstructed by the decoration display, so that the confirmation process of the character combination 200 can be facilitated.

  Further, when the sub-CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 performs the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the initial operation control, the character combination 200, the arm member 300, Control is performed so that the finger member 311 operates. In other words, the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control do not perform the same operation as the actual operation confirmation operation control. Since it is not necessary to prepare a decoration display corresponding to the operation control at the time of detection in advance, the control load can be reduced.

  (2) Also, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the characters “setting change” which is not displayed during the game when being controlled to the setting change state during the initial operation (starting process). Is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the store clerk recognize that the setting is changed. Further, since the decoration display is not executed during the activation process, it is possible to prevent the decoration display from hindering the visual recognition of the characters “setting change”.

  (3) Conventionally, when a movable member such as the character accessory 200 is operated, display effects such as an effect image can be displayed on the display means such as the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the operation of the movable member. There has been a document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-208308) in which a product is disclosed. However, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is not possible to display an effect effect display according to the situation when the movable member operates, and an effect of linking the operation of the movable member and the effect effect display of the display means. There was a problem that the effect was insufficient. The present embodiment has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the production effect by linking the operation of the movable body and the production effect display of the display means. It is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, any one of a flameless effect, a small flame effect, and a large flame effect can be executed as the squeak effect. Further, according to these effects, the flame image can be prevented from being displayed, or the size of the flame image can be varied (different decorative display can be performed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of linking the displacement of the character accessory 200 and the decoration display.

  (4) By the way, conventionally, there is a gaming machine provided with display means such as a liquid crystal display 51 and a movable member such as a character accessory 200. In such a gaming machine, a document is disclosed in which a predetermined image is displayed on the display means when the movable member is displaced to a position overlapping with the display means, and the operation of the movable member is emphasized (for example, JP 2013-099572). In the gaming machine described in this document, only a rough predetermined image is displayed in order to emphasize the operation of the movable member, and it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the game by the effect using the movable member. The present embodiment has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can further enhance the gaming interest by the effect using the movable member.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56C, the finger member 311 of the character accessory 200 can be changed into goo, choki, and par, and an effect image 320 corresponding to the shape after the change can be displayed. It is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of production in which the change of the finger member 311 and the display of the effect image 320 are linked.

  (5) By the way, heretofore, a gaming machine has been disclosed that gives a player some sort of command (mission) during a game and informs the player of the achievement of the mission when the mission is achieved during the game. There are other documents (for example, JP-A-2014-158854). In the gaming machine described in this document, when the operation of the movable member is included in the performance conditions predetermined as the mission, the mission is achieved when the movable member is operated for a reason other than the performance operation. There was a case. The present embodiment has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that prevents the achievement of a mission when a movable accessory is operated for a reason other than a production operation.

  In the present embodiment, among the 100 types of mission achievement conditions shown in FIG. 48, there is a mission for operating the character combination 200 (for example, missions M3 and M5). When the mission achievement condition of the mission M3 or the mission M5 is established, the character accessory 200 operates and the mission achievement notification is executed. However, when the character accessory 200 performs an action different from the effect action, the execution of the mission achievement notice is limited (the mission achievement notice is not executed). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, in the activation process of the sub-control unit 91, the initial operation of the accessory is executed in S52, but the mission achievement notification is not executed based on this initial operation. If the mission achievement notification is executed during the initial operation of the gaming machine (during the start-up process), when the store clerk confirms the initial operation of the character accessory 200, the initial operation of the character accessory 200 is performed. There is a possibility that the mission completion notification may be obstructed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the mission achievement notification is not executed during the initial operation of the gaming machine (during the startup process). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the character combination 200 from being obstructed by the mission completion notification, the confirmation process of the character combination 200 can be facilitated.

  (6) There are a plurality of timings at which the character combination 200 operates. In this embodiment, the character combination 200 operates when the mission achievement conditions of the combination-related missions (missions M3 and M5) shown in FIG. 48 are satisfied, or when a predetermined combination operation condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the opportunity to operate the character combination 200 can be increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

  (7) Further, when the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is satisfied (YES in S88 of FIG. 46), even if the character accessory 200 does not operate due to a failure of the first driving device 99a ( Mission completion notification is executed (S96). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the “irrational that the mission achievement notification is not executed because the operation of the character accessory 200 is impossible due to a failure or the like even if the mission achievement condition of the accessory-related mission is satisfied”. , Can prevent a decrease in interest.

  (8) By the way, as a conventional slot machine, a winning line related to the occurrence of a prize (the result of the game) and an invalid line not related to the occurrence of a prize are set, and when a winning combination is won, a predetermined notification effect is given. There is a document (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083302) that discloses that a winning combination occurs when the winning symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops on the winning line. In addition, as a winning combination, when the winning symbol combination is set to be disjoint and the winning symbol combination is stopped on the winning line, the matching of the predetermined symbols on the invalid line is stopped, and a winning is generated. A role (for example, an upper bell) was provided. However, the notification effect executed in the slot machine described in this document suggests a predetermined symbol that stops on an invalid line, not a symbol that constitutes a winning symbol combination that stops on a winning line. As a result, there is a possibility that the player may be misidentified as if the predetermined symbol stopped on the invalid line is the result of the game. The present embodiment has been conceived in view of such a situation, and an object thereof is to provide a slot machine that prevents a game result from being misidentified.

  Specifically, when the sub-control unit 91 performs an effect suggesting that the cherry lip has been won, and when the stop switch is operated at the timing when the target is successfully pressed, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c). Cherry patterns are aligned on the winning line LN including the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C. Further, when the sub-control unit 91 performs an effect suggesting that the cherry lip is won, and as shown in FIGS. 49D to 49F, when the stop switch is operated at the timing when the pressing failure occurs, the winning line is displayed. While the replay symbols are aligned on the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C on the LN, the cherry symbols are derived on the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. Thus, even when the stop switch is operated at a timing different from the success timing, the display result indicating the cherry lip winning is derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. Therefore, it can be shown that the display result displayed on the winning line LN is a cherry lip winning, and the display result displayed on the winning line LN is mistaken as a display result displayed on the invalid line. Can be prevented.

  (9) Also, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), when the stop switches 8L to 8R are operated at a timing when the strong cherry lip is won, the left reel 2L and the middle reel on the pay line LN are operated. There are cherry symbols on the right reel 2R as well as 2C. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the cherry symbols are derived to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, the cherry symbols can also be derived to the right reel 2R, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c) and 49 (f). In addition, the control content for the right reel 2R can be shared.

  (10) Also, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the right reel 2R is first stopped at the time of cherry lip winning, a cherry symbol is derived to the right reel 2R on the pay line LN. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result displayed on the winning line LN before the operation of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C from being mistaken as the display result displayed on the invalid line.

  (11) Also, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c) and 49 (f), failing to push, cherry symbols are not derived on the left reel 2L and middle reel 2C, and cherry symbols are displayed on the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. In the event that is deducted, the re-playing role will also win as a strong cherry lip prize. Therefore, a winning occurs even if the cherry symbols are not derived to the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  (12) By the way, as a conventional slot machine, measures to prevent the preparation to grasp whether or not the setting change related to the advantage and disadvantage of the player was executed between the closing of the hall (game hall) and the start of business the next day. There was a document (for example, Japanese Patent No. 5757489) in which the slot machine taken is disclosed. Here, preparation is an act of winning a winning combination when the store is closed on the previous day and ending the game in a state where a number of “1” or more is displayed on the display device. By such an action, if the value is maintained at the start of business on the next day, it is found that the setting has not been changed, and if the display content is “0”, the setting has been changed. . In this document, in order to prevent such preparation, there has been disclosed a technique capable of setting the display content to “0” by a simple medal settlement operation or BET operation compared to the conventional art. However, in the slot machine described in this document, in order to prevent the preparation, an operation by a store clerk is necessary, which takes time and effort. The present embodiment has been conceived in view of such a situation, and an object of the present embodiment is to provide a slot machine that prevents preparation while reducing the work burden on a store clerk.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, when a small winning prize is generated and 30 seconds have passed since the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the number-of-payout display unit 12, the display on the number-of-payout display unit 12 is displayed. Is controlled to change to “0” which is the initial state. Similarly, the BET display unit and the winning display unit are controlled so that the lighting state is changed to the initial off state after 30 seconds have passed since the small role winning. In this way, preparation can be prevented while reducing the work burden on the store clerk in the hall.

  (13) Also, as shown in FIGS. 54B and 54E, information regarding the number of medals to be paid out is notified in the payout number display section 12. In this way, it is possible to take measures against preparation for the payout amount display unit 12 that allows the player to easily execute preparation.

  (14) Also, as shown in FIG. 54, when the number of payouts is displayed on the payout number display unit 12 and the slot machine 1 is turned off and then turned on again, 30 seconds have elapsed. By doing so, the display mode of the payout amount display unit 12 is controlled to a state in which “0” is displayed. In this way, the notification state of the payout number display unit 12 can be controlled to display “0” by the power-on operation at the time of opening without waiting for the passage of time when the store is closed.

  (15) Also, the demonstration effect is executed after 30 seconds from the end of the previous game. Therefore, the timer for counting 30 seconds from the small role winning and the timer for timing that the demonstration effect is executed after 30 seconds from the end of the previous game can be made common.

  (16) Alternatively, the power saving mode may be set after 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the previous game. In this way, a timer for timing 30 seconds from the small role winning and a timer for timing the switching to the power saving mode after 30 seconds from the end of the previous game can be shared.

  (17) Also, as shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (e), “30” is displayed on the payout number display unit 12 after 30 seconds have passed with the payout number display unit 12 displayed. Controlled by the state. In this way, by waiting for 30 seconds to elapse, the display state of the payout amount display unit 12 can be made the same state after the end of the setting change state without the operation of the store clerk.

[Second Embodiment]
In the second embodiment, the idea described in the first embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as much as possible. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a big hit lottery is executed when a game medium (game ball) passes a predetermined start area. The big hit lottery is a lottery determined to be any one of “Do not control with big hits,” “Control with big hits with no probability change”, and “Control with big wins with probability change”. The big hit state is an advantageous state in which a round game in which the variable winning device is opened is executed a predetermined number of times. The jackpot with probability variation is the one that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot state ends. The probability variation state is a state in which the winning probability of jackpot is higher than a predetermined state (a state that is not controlled to the probability variation state).

  In addition, an effect display device capable of displaying various images is provided near the center of the game area. Further, the pachinko gaming machine includes a character accessory 200 and can execute a janken presentation. In the present embodiment, the execution opportunity of the Janken production is a big hit lottery. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine activation process, the initial action of the character accessory 200 is executed (a process corresponding to S52 in FIG. 41). In each part of the main control part and each part of the sub-control part, an error detection process for detecting the presence or absence of an error is executed. In the first embodiment, in the example of FIG. 57, the characters “setting change” are displayed during the initial operation. In the second embodiment, during the initial operation, the error detection process is executed, and when it is detected that there is no error, the characters “no error” are displayed. In FIG. 47, FIG. 47A is a table used when the big hit lottery is not won, and FIG. 47B is a table used when the big hit lottery is won. is there. In FIG. 47 (B), “the number of assigned AT games is 1-150” is replaced with “when a winning jackpot without probability change is won”, and “the number of assigned AT games is 151-300”. , "When a jackpot with probability change is won" is substituted. Even with such a configuration pachinko gaming machine, the effects described in the first embodiment can be achieved.

[Modification]
As mentioned above, although main embodiment in this invention has been described, this invention is not restricted to said embodiment, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described. Each modification can be combined with each other as long as there is no problem.

  For example, although the character combination 200 including a plurality of movable bodies is illustrated in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect provided in the center shown in FIG. An accessory Y1 including one movable body that can be advanced from the lower side in front of the display device, and an accessory Y2 including one movable body that can be dropped from the upper side in front of the effect display device, and a part of the effect display It may be provided with a plurality of accessories having only one movable body, such as a pachinko gaming machine P which is provided so as to cover the display area of the apparatus and which has an accessory Y3 having one rotating movable body. As long as these actors Y1 to Y3 operate, any effect image (for example, an effect image or the like) corresponding to each of the actors Y1 to Y3 may be displayed on the effect display device. In addition, the operation | movement mode (for example, a moving direction and a rotation direction) and the number of installation of these accessories are not restricted to the above, but can be changed variously. Moreover, you may apply the movable accessory which operate | moves with an operation | movement aspect other than the above.

  Moreover, although the embodiment does not illustrate the form in which the rotating combination 201 is not the origin detection target combination, the present invention is not limited to this, and the position between the origin position and the effect position is not limited thereto. As for the accessory that does not move (operate), the origin position may be detected with the specific rotation position as the origin position.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the mode of performing the non-detection-time operation control or the detection-time operation control as the first operation control is exemplified for one movable body in the accessory initialization process. It is not limited, and at least only non-detection operation control may be executed. When only non-detection-time operation control can be executed, non-detection-time operation control does not have to be executed when the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor in the accessory initialization process.

  In the embodiment, when the sub CPU 91a executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as the first operation control, the movable accessory operates at the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation as the second operation control is described. What is necessary is just to control so that a movable accessory operates at the following speeds. You may control. In this case, it is preferable that the operation speed dedicated to the first operation control is set to a different operation speed dedicated to the first operation control corresponding to each movable body in accordance with the identification and physical properties of each movable body.

  In the embodiment, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control that is the first operation control, it is always movable at a preset single operation speed (the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). The mode is illustrated in which the accessory is operated, that is, the movable accessory is controlled to always operate at a constant speed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when returning to the origin position. Alternatively, control may be performed so that the operation is performed at a speed lower than the minimum speed by gradually decelerating from the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. In other words, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control that is the first operation control, if the speed is lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, the speed is varied in a predetermined movement period. Also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control that is the first operation control, the operation of the movable accessory is performed at the same operation speed (the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). Although the form to control was illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum speed in the non-detection operation control is controlled to be equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the detection operation control. For example, the movable accessory may be operated at different operation speeds in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control.

  In the above embodiment, when a specific abnormality such as an error has occurred, when the movable accessory is not detected by the detection means, that is, the origin detection sensor detects in step S109 in the second initialization process. In the case where it is not in the state, until the operation error determination count reaches “3”, the mode of repeatedly performing the control of moving each movable accessory toward the origin position direction at the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the movable accessory operates at a speed lower than the minimum speed in the operation control at the time of detection, for example, a special speed that is set for an error and is a low speed at which a relatively large torque can be obtained. You may make it control so that it may do.

  In the embodiment, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in step S124 in the accessory initialization process, that is, when the operation subject accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position). The processes of S122 to S127 are repeated until the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, based on the set process data, the movable accessory based on the minimum control speed set in the actual operation check operation control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state in step S124 in the accessory initialization process, Executes non-detection motion control to move the movable accessory from the base to the home position based on the minimum control speed set in the actual motion check motion control. It may be so that.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the actual operation confirmation operation control in the accessory initialization process, the sub CPU 91a accelerates and decelerates the movable body in each of the forward operation and the backward operation, and changes from low speed → high speed → low speed → stop. However, the operation speed in the operation control for the movable body effect and the operation control for the actual operation confirmation is not limited to the above-described form, for example, low speed → high speed → low speed → high speed → low speed Control may be performed such that the low speed and the high speed are repeated a plurality of times such as stop, or the operation speed may be controlled to change in the order of low speed → medium speed → high speed.

  Further, control may be performed so that the change mode and the minimum speed of the operation speed are different between the forward operation and the reverse operation. If the minimum speed is different between forward operation and reverse operation, the maximum speed in non-detection operation control or detection operation control is set to the lower speed of forward operation and reverse operation in actual operation check operation control. What is necessary is just to set so that it may become the speed below the minimum speed.

  In the above embodiment, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation in the accessory initialization process, the sub CPU 91a exemplifies a form in which control is performed to change the operation speed by accelerating and decelerating the movable body. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body may be controlled to operate at a single operation speed. When the movable body is controlled to operate at a single operation speed in this way, the single operation speed is the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. What is necessary is just to set the maximum speed in operation control so that it may become the speed below this minimum speed.

  In the above embodiment, the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control as the first operation control are exemplified in the accessory initialization process that is performed when the slot machine 1 is activated. It is not limited to this, but at a timing other than the time of startup (for example, after execution of error processing including an accessory error or other various errors, at the start of symbol variation, or after execution of an accessory effect). May be executed.

  Further, the order of the movable bodies in the accessory initialization process in the embodiment is merely an example, and the order is arbitrary, and each operation may be executed in an order other than the above. In addition, although an example in which the operation control for actual operation confirmation is performed after performing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control for all the movable bodies is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, After performing non-detection motion control or detection operation and actual operation confirmation operation control of a movable body, non-detection operation control or detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control of another movable body is performed. You may make it do. Further, any one of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control for two or more movable objects out of the plurality may be executed together in parallel.

  In addition, although an example in which the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed after performing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control for all the movable accessories is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, After performing non-detection operation control or detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control of one movable accessory, other non-detection operation control or detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control are performed. You may make it perform.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form which assumed that the same operation content as the operation | movement at the time of an effect production was described as process data for actual operation | movement confirmation was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this. As the operation control for actual operation confirmation, as long as all the operations of the operation speed in the actual performance are included, the operation may not be completely the same, for example, a plurality of performance operations in which some of the operations are different. If there is, it may be the process data for actual operation confirmation describing the operation exclusively for confirmation incorporating all of the plurality of different rendering operations.

  In the above-described embodiment, the operation error determination number of S113, S127, and S213 is exemplified as “3”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation error determination number is “3”. The number of times of operation error determination in S113, S127, and S213 may be set differently.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation were illustrated in the second initialization process, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the execution timing of the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control can be arbitrarily set. For example, after the end of the movable body effect, when the symbol variation display is started, or when the demonstration effect is executed. It may be executed when it is done.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the slot machine 1 and the pachinko game machine are illustrated as an example of a game machine, this invention is not limited to this, For example, the game ball of a predetermined number of balls is included. The number of game balls used in a game is added to the number of loaned balls that are enclosed inside the gaming machine so that they can be circulated and lent in response to a loan request from a player, and the number of prize balls that are awarded in response to winnings. The present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed game machines, not the game ball but points and points are given to the player, so these points and points assigned correspond to the game value.

[Information displayed during initial operation]
In the first embodiment, the specific information displayed on the liquid crystal display during execution of the startup process is the character “setting change” in the first embodiment, and “no error” in the second embodiment. It was described as a character. However, this specific information may be any information as long as the information is not displayed during the game. For example, in the startup process of the first embodiment, when the error detection process for detecting the presence or absence of an error is executed, and it is detected that no error exists, the characters “no error” are displayed. Also good. In the error detection process, when the error detection process is executed using a checksum, characters such as “checksum OK” may be displayed as the specific information.

  Further, the specific information of at least one of the first embodiment and the second embodiment may be other information. For example, characters such as “executing initial operation” may be displayed as the specific information. Further, the specific information may not be displayed during the initial operation.

[About benefits]
In the above-described example, the value directly affecting the payout rate of medals and pachinko balls, such as AT winning and the number of AT games that can be controlled by the AT, is exemplified as the benefits. However, the privilege may be a value that improves the degree of advantage for the player, and may be a value that does not directly affect the medal payout rate, for example. Specifically, when an AT lottery has a high probability state in which AT is won with a higher probability than usual, execution of a probability suggestion effect to suggest whether or not the current state is a high probability state , Execution of a premier effect together with sound on the liquid crystal display 51 (special character appearance, execution of special bonus effect in the next generated bonus, etc.), execution of a set value suggestion effect to suggest a set value, Collecting a certain number of liquid crystal displays a two-dimensional code that gives points that can be exchanged for services determined at the amusement store where the slot machine 1 is installed, and that can download bonus videos and bonus information on a predetermined website A display or the like may be displayed in the device 51.

  Moreover, although the number of AT games is illustrated as an example of the privilege, the privilege related to the AT is not limited to this. Good. In addition, when the number of times that the navigation effect can be executed is determined and the AT is controlled until the navigation effect is executed for the determined number of times that the navigation effect can be executed, Good. Further, for example, when the upper limit grant amount is determined and the AT is controlled until the assigned game value (medal payout number) reaches the determined upper limit grant amount, the upper limit grant amount may be a privilege. In addition, when the AT is controlled from when the predetermined AT start condition is satisfied until the predetermined AT end condition is satisfied, and if the AT is continued when the AT end condition is satisfied, the continuous lottery is performed. The continuation probability determined to continue in the lottery may be used as a privilege.

[About the mode of an accessory]
In the present embodiment, the character combination 200 (the finger member 311) has been described as being changeable, as shown in FIG. However, the aspect in which the character combination 200 can be changed may be another concept. A mode in which the character combination 200 can be changed may be, for example, a driving position of the character combination 200. For example, when the first privilege is granted, the driving distance (movement distance) of the character accessory 200 is L1, and the second privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege (the amount of privilege is greater) is given. Let L2 be the driving distance (movement distance) of the character actor 200 at. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize the advantage of the privilege that has been granted based on the movement distance of the character accessory 200, and thus attention can be gathered with respect to the movement distance.

  Further, the effect image of the character combination 200 can be displayed with different decoration depending on the moving distance of the character combination 200. For example, when the driving position of the character accessory 200 is a driving position whose driving distance is L1, an effect image is displayed at the driving position. When the driving position of the character accessory 200 is a driving position whose driving distance is L2, an effect image is displayed at the driving position.

  According to such a configuration, the moving distance of the character combination 200 can be varied, and the decoration display according to the mode after the change of the character combination 200 can be executed. It is possible to improve the effect of production in which the change of the display and the decoration display are linked.

  In addition, the action of the accessory is not limited to the one in which the accessory is displaced, and includes the one in which at least a part of the accessory is changed although the accessory is not displaced.

[Operations different from the performance operations of the character object 200]
In the present embodiment, the initial operation (see S52 in FIG. 41) in the activation process is illustrated as an operation different from the effect operation of the character accessory 200. However, an operation different from the effect operation of the character accessory 200 may be another operation.

  For example, when the AT lottery is executed and the AT lottery is not won, the character accessory 200 located at the initial position moves in the driving position direction, but does not move to the driving position. Specific control that returns to the initial position in the middle may be executed. That is, the specific control is control of gas. An operation different from the effect operation of the character accessory 200 may be an operation of moving the character accessory 200 halfway through this specific control.

  In addition, due to the failure of the first driving device 99a, the character combination 200 may move even though the condition for moving the character combination 200 is not satisfied. The operation different from the effect operation of the character combination 200 may be another operation of the character combination 200 at the time of the failure of the first driving device 99a.

  In addition, when the player is vibrated from the outside by a player or the like, the character combination 200 operates even though the conditions for operating the character combination 200 are not satisfied. May end up. The motion different from the performance operation of the character accessory 200 may be another motion of the character accessory 200 when such a vibration is applied.

[About mission completion notification]
In the slot machine according to the first embodiment, it has been described that the slot machine includes only physical reels (hereinafter referred to as main reels). However, a sub reel may be provided in addition to the main reel. The sub reels are provided corresponding to the number of main reels. For example, three sub reels are provided. The sub reel variation control and stop control are executed in correspondence with the main reel variation control and stop control. The sub reel may be a reel that is electronically displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 or may be a physical reel. Further, each identification information of the main reel is a figure that is difficult to be specified by the player (for example, all similar figures), while each identification information of the sub reel is a figure that is easily specified by the player (for example, FIG. 5). It is also possible to use a graphic as shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, the player advances the game while watching the change and stop of the sub reel. The mission completion notification is to display a mission achievement character such as “Mission M1! Congratulations!” When mission M1 is completed.

  In such a configuration, when the sub-reel is changing, the mission completion notification is executed with priority over the sub-reel change display, and when the display result is derived by stopping the sub-reel, the display result is displayed. Priority is given to the mission achievement notification.

  For example, “When the sub reel changes, the mission achievement character is displayed on the front layer of the sub reel, while when the display result is derived by stopping the sub reel, the display result is displayed. Specific display control of “displaying the mission achievement character in a predetermined manner (for example, in a small size) in a different area” may be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the mission achievement character is displayed in an easy-to-see manner during the change of the sub-reel which is not very important for the player, so that the player can recognize the mission achievement character. On the other hand, when the display result of the sub-reel important to the player is derived, the mission achievement character is displayed in a manner that makes it easy to see the display result, so that the visual recognition of the derived display result of the sub-reel is not hindered. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, the specific display control may be executed after the main reel is provided without the sub reel. In this case, it is preferable that the specific display control is executed in such a manner that the player's eyes are not obstructed while the main reel is changing. For example, mission completion characters may be displayed on the front surface of the main reel at a low density. Further, when the display result is derived by stopping the main reel, the mission achievement character may be displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, small).

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the specific display control may be executed.

[About decoration display]
(1) The decorative display of the present embodiment has been described as being executed when a part of the character combination 200 overlaps the liquid crystal display 51. However, the decoration display may be executed when all the character objects 200 overlap with the liquid crystal display 51. The decoration display may be executed when the character combination 200 does not overlap with the liquid crystal display 51.

  (2) The decoration display of the present embodiment has been described as a process of displaying a specific image (such as the flame image 310 and the enemy character image 400 in the example of FIG. 57) on the liquid crystal display 51. However, the decoration display may not be a process of displaying an image. For example, a configuration may be used in which predetermined information (for example, “chance” characters) is displayed by emitting light. In the case where such a configuration is adopted, the decoration display may be a process of causing the light emitting board to emit light.

  (3) In the present embodiment, it has been described that the processing that is executed in accordance with the driving of the character combination 200 is decoration display. However, the processing executed as the character combination 200 is driven may be execution of the combination effect. The accessory effect may be an effect including at least one of an effect of displaying a predetermined image, an effect of outputting a predetermined effect sound, and an effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner.

  For example, when the accessory effect is an effect that outputs a predetermined sound, the control described with reference to FIG. 57 is configured as follows. During the turn production, the character combination 200 is driven and production sound is output. In addition, during the execution of the activation process (initial operation), the character accessory 200 is driven while no effect sound is output. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to prevent “confirmation of the character accessory 200 from being disturbed by the effect sound output by the effect effect”, the confirmation process of the character accessory 200 can be facilitated. it can.

[Reel arrangement]
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the right reel 2 </ b> R is always arranged within 5 frames that are within a range where the cherry symbols can be drawn. Therefore, at the time of winning the cherry lip, the cherry symbol can be always derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. However, in addition to the right reel 2R, at least one of the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C may be arranged within a range in which the cherry symbols can be drawn. By adopting such a reel arrangement, it is possible to cope with various controls.

  For example, in the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, the cherry symbols may be arranged within a range where the cherry symbols can be drawn. With such a reel arrangement, if the left symbol is missed during the strong cherry lip winning, the symbol combination of replay-cherry-cherry can be derived. In this way, the cherry lip winning can be shown more clearly. Also, if the left symbol is missed during the weak cherry lip winning, it can be shown that the strong cherry lip has been missed by deriving the symbol combination of replay-replay-cherry. Further, for example, when the replay symbols are likely to be aligned with the invalid line LM4, it is possible to easily understand that the cherry lip has been won by deriving the cherry symbols to the middle stage of the middle reel 2C. In this way, by changing the symbol arrangement, it is possible to cope with various derived displays, and it is possible to execute control suited to the machine flexibly.

[Notification production]
In the first embodiment, it has been described that an effect using a character image is executed as a notification effect. However, the notification effect may be controlled by lighting the effect LED 52, the reel LED 55, etc., and indicated by the lighting color. Further, the notification effect is not executed when the start switch 7 is operated, but may be executed at any timing in one game. For example, you may make it suggest by making LED light-emit that all the reels were won by cherry lip after stopping.

[About push order]
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, it is derived even when the same lottery winning combination is won by one of the timing when the eye is successful and the timing when the eye fails. The pattern combination was different. However, when the same lottery object combination is won, the symbol combinations derived by the pressing order (operation procedure) may be different.

  For example, Replay-Replay-Cherry and Cherry-Cherry-Cherry are set as winning combinations as a symbol combination at the time of winning strong cherry lip. Then, the left first stop is set as the correct answer procedure, and the middle and right first stops are set as the incorrect answer procedure. In such a case, if the first left stop is executed at the time of strong cherry lip winning, cherry-cherry-cherry is preferentially drawn, and if the middle or right first stop is executed, the replay- Replay-cherry may be drawn preferentially. It should be noted that if the cherry symbols are arranged in a range that can be pulled in all reels, the cherry-cherry-cherry can always be derived when operated in the correct procedure. In addition, the cherry lip winning may be determined at the position of the cherry symbol on the left reel 2L, and it may be determined whether the winning combination is a strong cherry lip, a weak cherry lip, or a middle cherry lip.

  In addition, a display result that is a correct procedure may be derived only when an operation of stopping the change display of symbols in a specific pressing order and when the operation is operated at a specific timing.

[About the number of payouts]
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, it is shown that a winning occurs at any timing of the timing when the eye press succeeds and the timing when the eye press fails. However, the number of medals to be paid out may be different between the timing when the eye is successfully pushed and the timing when the eye is failed. For example, when the symbol is derived at the timing when the eye press succeeds, the number of payouts may be increased compared to when the symbol is derived at the timing when the eye press fails. Also, with regard to the pressing order, the correct answer procedure may have a larger number of payouts than the incorrect answer procedure. In addition, the number of medals to be paid out may be the same at the timing when the pushing succeeds and the timing when the pushing fails.

[About predetermined prizes]
In the first embodiment, the re-playing combination such as cherry lip is exemplified as the predetermined winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a small combination accompanied by a medal may be used. In this case, the small combination as the predetermined prize may be constituted by the same symbol combination as the cherry lip or watermelon shown in the first embodiment. In such a case, the identification information on the winning line LN becomes the specific identification information (cherry symbol) as a display result of the right reel 2R, which is the specific variable display portion of the plurality of variable display portions, regardless of the timing and the pressing order. The display result may be derived. For example, when a cherry that is a small role as a predetermined prize is won, a prize winning suggestion for cherry is executed. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped at the timing of successful pressing, it is only necessary to derive a cherry symbol on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L and pay out three medals. Further, when the left reel 2L is stopped at the timing when the eye press fails (when the cherry symbol is missed on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L), it is only necessary to prevent the medal from being paid out. However, even if a cherry symbol is missed on the winning line LN of the left reel 2L, the cherry symbol can be stopped on the winning line LN of the right reel 2R regardless of timing (for example, replay-replay). -Cherries are aligned on the winning line LN), so that it is possible to prevent misidentification between the winning suggestion effect and the display result of the winning of cherry. Even if a small combination is missed, there may be not less than a medal payout compared to a case where a small combination is not missed. Further, even if a small combination is missed or a small combination is not missed, the same number of medals may be paid out.

[Specific identification information derivable on a predetermined line as a display result of the predetermined variable display unit]
In the first embodiment, as an example of the specific reel information that can be derived on a predetermined line as the display result of the predetermined variable display unit, the example of the symbol of the right reel among the symbol combinations that generate cherry lip has been described. However, the specific identification information that can be derived on the predetermined line as the display result of the predetermined variable display section may be a symbol that is not related to the occurrence of the predetermined winning. That is, the predetermined prize may be generated regardless of the identification information stopped on other reels by stopping the specific identification information on some reels. In this case, the display result of the predetermined variable display unit The specific identification information derivable on a predetermined line may be a symbol that stops on another reel. More specifically, for example, the predetermined prize may be a prize that occurs in any of Cherry-ANY-ANY and Lip-ANY-ANY. Even in this case, when the predetermined winning is won, the display result displayed on the winning line LN is such that the reel control is performed so that the cherry symbol of the right reel 2R is always drawn on the winning line LN. Can be prevented from being mistaken as a display result displayed on an invalid line.

[About specified lines]
In the first embodiment, when the stop operation is executed at the timing when the eye press is successful, a specific symbol (cherry symbol) is displayed on the winning line LN as the predetermined line, and at the timing when the eye press fails. When the stop operation was executed, a specific symbol (cherry symbol) was displayed on the winning line LN only for the right reel. However, the predetermined line may be an invalid line instead of a winning line. When a stop operation is executed at the timing when the eye press succeeds, a specific symbol is displayed on the invalid line. When a stop operation is executed at the timing when the eye press fails, the stop symbol is displayed on the invalid line. A specific symbol may be displayed on the screen.

[Reel stop timing]
In the first embodiment, when the right reel 2R is first stopped at the time of cherry lip winning, the cherry symbol is derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. However, even if the right reel 2R is not stopped first, the cherry symbol may be derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN. For example, the cherry symbol may be derived to the right reel 2R on the winning line LN even if the first stop fails and the right reel 2R is stopped for the second time.

[About the winning suggestion]
In the first embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 does not determine the winning suggestion effect, but the main control unit 41 may determine the winning suggestion effect. For example, the main control unit 41, when an internal lottery wins a simultaneous winning combination and an AT lottery is performed, a process for executing a winning suggestion effect that indicates whether or not a BB winning and an AT winning are performed at a predetermined timing. May be performed. As the winning suggestion effect, for example, a freeze effect that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period when the start switch 7 is operated may be provided. During the freeze effect, a pseudo game is executed in which the reels 2L to 2R are rotated in a predetermined manner to temporarily stop a specific symbol combination. The simulated game can be executed a plurality of times during the freeze effect. The freeze effect is not limited to the one that is executed when the start switch 7 is operated. When the first stop operation is performed or when the third stop operation is performed, the display result is derived and one game is completed. It may be executed at times.

  In addition, the reliability of the BB winning or AT winning is the highest in the freeze effect, followed by the consecutive hit effect, the button effect, and the character B effect in order of the character A effect. The ratio may be determined so that the type is determined. The effect to be executed is not limited to one in which one winning suggestion effect is determined, and a plurality of winning suggestion effects may be determined. In addition, the predetermined timing for executing the winning suggestion effect is not limited to this, but is determined by the main control unit 41 from a plurality of timings (more specifically, the main control unit 41 notifies the result by the AT winning suggestion effect). The timing may be determined by a random number lottery or the like (for example, any game among 0 to 32 games) from a game won by a specific lottery target role. The main control unit 41 outputs a command for specifying the type of the winning suggestion effect to the sub-control unit 91 at a predetermined timing for executing the winning suggestion effect, and if the winning suggestion effect is a freeze effect, You may make it perform the process for freeze production. The winning suggestion effect other than the freeze effect may be configured to be determined by the sub-control unit 91 as described in the first embodiment.

[About red 7 pattern]
In the first embodiment, the case where the cherry symbol is stopped on any of the winning lines LN when one of the cherry rips is won has been described. However, at the time of winning the cherry lip, the cherry symbols need not be derived to any of the winning lines LN. For example, a case where the cherry symbol does not stop on the active line in FIG. 50C at the time of winning the middle cherry lip (when the cherry symbol is not derived on the upper stage of the right reel) may be provided. In such a case, the red 7 symbol is a symbol that is common to the cherry symbol and the red aspect. Therefore, when the red 7 symbol stops on the winning line LN, even if the cherry symbol is not derived, a winning suggestion effect (for example, a red character image) suggesting cherry lip winning at the time of cherry lip winning. Or notification with a red LED). As described above, since there is a related symbol (a symbol having a common color) on the winning line LN, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the player even if the winning suggestion effect is executed.

[About the status at RT3]
In the first embodiment, during RT3, the maintenance lips 1 to 3 may be further read out as the lottery object combination and the internal lottery may be performed. As a result, for example, in the case of being controlled by RT3 in spite of being non-AT, when the maintenance lips 1 to 3 are won, it is possible to make it easy to fall to RT1 by winning the fall lip according to the operation procedure.

[Notification]
In 1st Embodiment, the BET display part, the payout number display part 12, and the winning display part were shown as an alerting | reporting part. However, the notification unit may be indicated by another part in the slot machine 1. For example, the effect effect LED 52 may be used to notify the small role winning by the lighting color, and the lighting may be erased when a predetermined time elapses.

  Moreover, you may make it apply 1st Embodiment only to any one alerting | reporting part. For example, the first embodiment may be applied only to the payout number display unit 12 as the notification unit.

[Initial state]
In the first embodiment, as the initial state of the notification unit, a display whose display indicates “0” and a display whose lighting is erased are shown. However, the initial display state of the notification unit does not indicate “0” and may be a display that is not displayed in the normal state. Further, instead of turning it off completely, the display brightness may be lowered and the display may be dim.

[About power interruption]
In the first embodiment, when a power failure occurs in the slot machine 1, it is displayed in the display mode of the notification unit before the power failure occurs after the power failure is restored, and the display mode becomes an initial state after 30 seconds have elapsed. showed that. However, the time before the occurrence of power interruption is counted, and the sum of the counted timer value and the timer value after power interruption recovery is 30 seconds. It may be made to become.

[About specific mode]
In 1st Embodiment, the time which transfers to specific mode and the time when the display aspect of an alerting | reporting part will be in an initial state from the time of a small prize winning were the same. However, these two periods need not be the same.

[Setting confirmation status]
In the first embodiment, the case where the display state of the various notification units is changed to the initial state when the setting value is changed by the reset / setting switch 38 is shown. However, when the setting confirmation state in which the setting value after the setting change state can be confirmed is entered, the display state of the various notification units may be changed to the initial state.

[About loss]
In the first embodiment, the following control may be executed when a failure occurs. In the case of a loss, the payout number display unit 12 and the winning display unit in FIG. 54 remain in the initial state, but the BET operation unit may be kept in the lighting display state. Then, the display mode of the BET operation unit may be extinguished after 30 seconds have elapsed. It should be noted that when the BET operation unit is in a lit state, when a power interruption occurs, the lit state is maintained after returning, and after the setting change state, after the settlement operation, and after the BET operation, the light is turned off. .

[About Re-Gamer]
In the first embodiment, the following control may be executed when a re-game player is won. For example, when a replay winning as a re-gamer is generated, the payout amount display unit 12 remains in the initial state, but the BET operation unit is controlled to turn on immediately after being turned off. Further, the winning display portion is controlled to be lit. In such a state, the winning display portion may be turned off after 30 seconds. In addition, it is preferable that the BET operation unit is controlled to be lit even when 30 seconds have elapsed. In the setting change state, the BET operation unit and the winning display unit may be controlled to the initial state. In addition, at the time of replay winning, the BET operation and the payment operation may be controlled so as not to be accepted. In addition, you may control so that BET operation and payment operation may be received at the time of a replay winning. In addition, when a power interruption occurs during a replay winning, the lighting state before the power interruption may be maintained. In the case where a power interruption occurs at the time of replay winning, it may be returned in an unlit state. In such a case, when the player inserts a medal (when one is detected) or when a BET operation is executed, the LEDs of the 1BETLED 14, the 2BETLED15, and the 3BETLED16 may be controlled to be lit. In this way, even if the game is ended by making a replay prize when the store is closed, the game is controlled to be turned off when the store is opened, so that preparation can be prevented.

[Advantageous state]
In the above-described example, as an advantageous state, a big bonus (BB) or AT having a higher probability than the case where the winning role of the small role is a predetermined state is illustrated as an advantageous state, but it may be an advantageous state for the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an example of a slot machine will be described below.

  Advantageous states include, for example, regular bonus () and replay time (RT) where the probability of winning a predetermined winning combination is high, concentrated state of small roles, and at least one reel retractable range is narrower than usual. At the same time, it does not change the challenge time (CT) in which the occurrence of all the small roles is permitted in each game, the winning probability of winning a winning combination, etc., but the operation procedure for winning the selected small role for a predetermined period ( For example, it may be a pseudo bonus for informing over 50 games. In addition, the probability of being controlled to these advantageous states may be a high probability, the probability of being controlled to the freeze state is high, and the number of games such as the number of AT games is high. You may set the advantageous state of a different aspect from the said embodiment, such as the state added and the state where it is easy to increase the number of additional games of AT. In addition, it is indirectly advantageous for the player, such as the condition for obtaining a privilege on the communication line network and the probability of establishing a condition for executing a premium effect (freeze effect, premium effect, etc.). It may be a state where a special privilege or an interest of the game is improved. Further, the allowance determining means for determining whether or not to allow the transition to the advantageous state is not limited to the internal lottery process, and may be a means for determining regardless of the winning combination.

[About production and notification]
In the above-described example, an example in which the liquid crystal display 51 is used to produce effects and notifications is given. For example, speakers 53 and 54, a back lamp (reel LED 55 in the above embodiment) arranged on the back side (inside) of the reel. ), Transmissive liquid crystal display arranged on the front side of the reel (liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be seen), lamps and LEDs mounted on the front door 1b, etc., vibration of the stop switch, around the stop switch The effect may be executed by means different from the above-described embodiment, such as air blowing from the air or a change in the temperature of the stop switch.

[About AT]
In the example of the slot machine, the example in which the main control unit 41 executes the control related to the AT has been described. However, the AT related control executed by the main control unit 41 includes execution of an AT lottery. The AT lottery may include winning or non-winning AT lottery, determining whether or not to stock the number of AT games, determining the number of AT games, adding the number of AT games, and the like. In addition, as a control related to the AT, a high probability state control of the AT lottery is exemplified. For the control of the high probability state of AT lottery, the control that increases the probability of winning the AT lottery, the control that shortens the period until the AT is controlled according to the result of the internal lottery, the winning probability of the extra lottery Includes controls that favor numbers. Further, as control related to AT, it is possible to control to AT when a prescribed number of games have been consumed. The case where the prescribed number of games have been consumed includes the case where the ceiling game number is reached and the case where the number of games determined by lottery is reached. Further, as control related to AT, control for setting a precursor period can be cited. The control for setting the precursor period includes, for example, control for producing effects of 0 to 32 games in the precursor period before the start of AT. Moreover, control which gives a penalty is mentioned as control which concerns on AT. The control for giving a penalty includes determination of penalty contents and determination or setting of a penalty period. In addition, as control related to AT, the main control unit 41 performs lighting control of a lamp and an LED indicating that AT is in progress.

  In addition, as the control related to AT, the main control unit 41 performs lighting control of lamps and LEDs for executing a navigation effect. Further, the sub control unit 91 may execute the navigation effect in conjunction with the main control unit 41 executing the navigation effect.

  When the main control unit 41 executes the control related to the AT, it is preferable that the process of the main control unit 41 is executed by the control unit subordinate to the main control unit 41 and subordinate to the main control unit 41. . For example, the control unit provided on the board other than the game control board executes the reel stop control, and the main control unit 41 transfers the operation signal of the stop switch to the control unit. In this way, by causing the lower-level control unit to perform the control of the main control unit 41, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the ROM 41b and the RAM 41c from being insufficient and the processing capacity of the main CPU 41a from being insufficient when performing the control related to the AT.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the control related to the above-described AT, but the sub control unit 91 may execute the control. The sub-control unit 91 performs, for example, an AT lottery process or an extra lottery process based on a command from the main control unit 41, a process for controlling the AT according to the result, a process for executing a navigation effect, etc. May be performed.

[Setting change status and setting check status]
With regard to the setting change state, it is also possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that “power ON” + “setting key switch ON” + “front door opening detection”. Thereby, an unauthorized setting change in a state where the front door is not opened can be prevented. Once the setting change state is entered, the setting change state is maintained regardless of the open / closed state of the front door until the end condition (setting key switch is turned OFF after setting value is established) is satisfied. You may make it do. As a result, even if the front door is closed during the setting change state, the setting change state is not terminated, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble of shifting to the setting change state again.

  In addition, regarding the setting confirmation state, “setting key switch ON” + “front door opening detection” may be used as a condition to shift to the setting confirmation state. Thereby, unauthorized setting confirmation in the state where the front door is not opened can be prevented. Once the setting confirmation state has been entered, the setting confirmation state is maintained regardless of whether the front door is open or closed until an end condition (setting key switch is turned OFF) for ending the setting confirmation state is satisfied. Also good. Thereby, even if the front door is closed during the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is not terminated, and therefore it is possible to prevent the trouble of shifting to the setting confirmation state again.

[Modification of slot machine]
In the above embodiment, the slot machine that pays out game media to the player's hand according to the occurrence of a win has been described. However, the game medium is enclosed, and the game media is paid out to the player's hand when a win occurs. An enclosing slot machine that adds game points (scores) without any change may be adopted. The base and the drum can be distributed, and the casing is common and only the base or the base and the drum is referred to as a gaming machine. In addition, the slot machine has a game area in which a game ball can be launched and a game can be played, and a betting amount can be set according to the game ball passing through a predetermined area provided in the game area. May be.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 12 payout number display part, 40 game control board, 41 main control part, 51 liquid crystal display, 90 effect control board, 91 sub control part, Character combination 200 and rotation combination 201.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A movable body provided to be operable between an origin position and a position away from the origin position;
Driving means for operating the movable body;
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body by the driving means;
Decoration display means capable of displaying a decoration image corresponding to the movable body;
With
The control means includes a first operation control for positioning the movable body at the origin position and an initialization operation control including a second operation control for confirming that the movable body can operate normally; It is possible to perform the third operation control for performing the effect by the movable body,
The decoration display means displays the decoration image when the movable body moves to a position other than the origin position during execution of the third operation control, and the movable body moves through the initialization operation control. When displaced to a position other than the origin position, the decorative image is not displayed,
In the second operation control, the control means controls the movable body to operate within a range of a first speed and a second speed faster than the first speed,
In the first operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the first speed in the second operation control.

Images